You can not select more than 25 topics Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.

11339 lines
309KB

  1. @chapter Filtering Introduction
  2. @c man begin FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  3. Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
  4. In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
  5. outputs.
  6. To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
  7. following filtergraph.
  8. @example
  9. [main]
  10. input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
  11. | ^
  12. |[tmp] [flip]|
  13. +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
  14. @end example
  15. This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
  16. stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
  17. back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
  18. following command to achieve this:
  19. @example
  20. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
  21. @end example
  22. The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
  23. onto the bottom half of the output video.
  24. Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
  25. linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
  26. @var{crop,vflip} are in one linear chain, @var{split} and
  27. @var{overlay} are separately in another. The points where the linear
  28. chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
  29. example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
  30. the labels @var{[main]} and @var{[tmp]}.
  31. The stream sent to the second output of @var{split}, labelled as
  32. @var{[tmp]}, is processed through the @var{crop} filter, which crops
  33. away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
  34. @var{overlay} filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
  35. split filter (which was labelled as @var{[main]}), and overlay on its
  36. lower half the output generated by the @var{crop,vflip} filterchain.
  37. Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
  38. after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
  39. by a colon.
  40. There exist so-called @var{source filters} that do not have an
  41. audio/video input, and @var{sink filters} that will not have audio/video
  42. output.
  43. @c man end FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  44. @chapter graph2dot
  45. @c man begin GRAPH2DOT
  46. The @file{graph2dot} program included in the FFmpeg @file{tools}
  47. directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
  48. corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
  49. Invoke the command:
  50. @example
  51. graph2dot -h
  52. @end example
  53. to see how to use @file{graph2dot}.
  54. You can then pass the dot description to the @file{dot} program (from
  55. the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
  56. of the filtergraph.
  57. For example the sequence of commands:
  58. @example
  59. echo @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} | \
  60. tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
  61. dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
  62. display graph.png
  63. @end example
  64. can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
  65. described by the @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string. Note that this string must be
  66. a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
  67. For example if your command line is of the form:
  68. @example
  69. ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
  70. @end example
  71. your @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string will need to be of the form:
  72. @example
  73. nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
  74. @end example
  75. you may also need to set the @var{nullsrc} parameters and add a @var{format}
  76. filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
  77. @c man end GRAPH2DOT
  78. @chapter Filtergraph description
  79. @c man begin FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  80. A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
  81. cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
  82. filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
  83. filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
  84. side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
  85. Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
  86. registered in the application, which defines the features and the
  87. number of input and output pads of the filter.
  88. A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
  89. output pads is called a "sink".
  90. @anchor{Filtergraph syntax}
  91. @section Filtergraph syntax
  92. A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
  93. recognized by the @option{-filter}/@option{-vf} and @option{-filter_complex}
  94. options in @command{ffmpeg} and @option{-vf} in @command{ffplay}, and by the
  95. @code{avfilter_graph_parse()}/@code{avfilter_graph_parse2()} functions defined in
  96. @file{libavfilter/avfilter.h}.
  97. A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
  98. connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
  99. represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
  100. A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
  101. filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
  102. descriptions.
  103. A filter is represented by a string of the form:
  104. [@var{in_link_1}]...[@var{in_link_N}]@var{filter_name}=@var{arguments}[@var{out_link_1}]...[@var{out_link_M}]
  105. @var{filter_name} is the name of the filter class of which the
  106. described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
  107. the filter classes registered in the program.
  108. The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
  109. "=@var{arguments}".
  110. @var{arguments} is a string which contains the parameters used to
  111. initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
  112. @itemize
  113. @item
  114. A ':'-separated list of @var{key=value} pairs.
  115. @item
  116. A ':'-separated list of @var{value}. In this case, the keys are assumed to be
  117. the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the @code{fade} filter
  118. declares three options in this order -- @option{type}, @option{start_frame} and
  119. @option{nb_frames}. Then the parameter list @var{in:0:30} means that the value
  120. @var{in} is assigned to the option @option{type}, @var{0} to
  121. @option{start_frame} and @var{30} to @option{nb_frames}.
  122. @item
  123. A ':'-separated list of mixed direct @var{value} and long @var{key=value}
  124. pairs. The direct @var{value} must precede the @var{key=value} pairs, and
  125. follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
  126. @var{key=value} pairs can be set in any preferred order.
  127. @end itemize
  128. If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the @code{format} filter
  129. takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
  130. '|'.
  131. The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "'" as initial
  132. and ending mark, and the character '\' for escaping the characters
  133. within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
  134. terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
  135. "[]=;,") is encountered.
  136. The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
  137. followed by a list of link labels.
  138. A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
  139. or input pad. The preceding labels @var{in_link_1}
  140. ... @var{in_link_N}, are associated to the filter input pads,
  141. the following labels @var{out_link_1} ... @var{out_link_M}, are
  142. associated to the output pads.
  143. When two link labels with the same name are found in the
  144. filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
  145. created.
  146. If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
  147. unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
  148. For example in the filterchain
  149. @example
  150. nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
  151. @end example
  152. the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
  153. instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
  154. "L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
  155. output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
  156. which are both unlabelled.
  157. In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
  158. pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
  159. filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
  160. Libavfilter will automatically insert @ref{scale} filters where format
  161. conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
  162. for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
  163. @code{sws_flags=@var{flags};}
  164. to the filtergraph description.
  165. Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
  166. @example
  167. @var{NAME} ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
  168. @var{LINKLABEL} ::= "[" @var{NAME} "]"
  169. @var{LINKLABELS} ::= @var{LINKLABEL} [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  170. @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS} ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
  171. @var{FILTER} ::= [@var{LINKLABELS}] @var{NAME} ["=" @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS}] [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  172. @var{FILTERCHAIN} ::= @var{FILTER} [,@var{FILTERCHAIN}]
  173. @var{FILTERGRAPH} ::= [sws_flags=@var{flags};] @var{FILTERCHAIN} [;@var{FILTERGRAPH}]
  174. @end example
  175. @section Notes on filtergraph escaping
  176. Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
  177. escaping. See @ref{quoting_and_escaping,,the "Quoting and escaping"
  178. section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils} for more
  179. information about the employed escaping procedure.
  180. A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
  181. value, which may contain the special character @code{:} used to
  182. separate values, or one of the escaping characters @code{\'}.
  183. A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
  184. may contain the escaping characters @code{\'} or the special
  185. characters @code{[],;} used by the filtergraph description.
  186. Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
  187. need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
  188. characters contained within it.
  189. For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
  190. the @ref{drawtext} filter description @option{text} value:
  191. @example
  192. this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
  193. @end example
  194. This string contains the @code{'} special escaping character, and the
  195. @code{:} special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
  196. @example
  197. text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
  198. @end example
  199. A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
  200. description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
  201. filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
  202. @example
  203. drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
  204. @end example
  205. (note that in addition to the @code{\'} escaping special characters,
  206. also @code{,} needs to be escaped).
  207. Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
  208. filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
  209. escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
  210. @code{\} is special and needs to be escaped with another @code{\}, the
  211. previous string will finally result in:
  212. @example
  213. -vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
  214. @end example
  215. @chapter Timeline editing
  216. Some filters support a generic @option{enable} option. For the filters
  217. supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
  218. evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
  219. the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
  220. next filter in the filtergraph.
  221. The expression accepts the following values:
  222. @table @samp
  223. @item t
  224. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  225. @item n
  226. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  227. @item pos
  228. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  229. @item w
  230. @item h
  231. width and height of the input frame if video
  232. @end table
  233. Additionally, these filters support an @option{enable} command that can be used
  234. to re-define the expression.
  235. Like any other filtering option, the @option{enable} option follows the same
  236. rules.
  237. For example, to enable a blur filter (@ref{smartblur}) from 10 seconds to 3
  238. minutes, and a @ref{curves} filter starting at 3 seconds:
  239. @example
  240. smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
  241. curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
  242. @end example
  243. @c man end FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  244. @chapter Audio Filters
  245. @c man begin AUDIO FILTERS
  246. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  247. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  248. The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
  249. build.
  250. Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
  251. @section adelay
  252. Delay one or more audio channels.
  253. Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
  254. The filter accepts the following option:
  255. @table @option
  256. @item delays
  257. Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.
  258. At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
  259. Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
  260. smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
  261. @end table
  262. @subsection Examples
  263. @itemize
  264. @item
  265. Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
  266. the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
  267. @example
  268. adelay=1500|0|500
  269. @end example
  270. @end itemize
  271. @section aecho
  272. Apply echoing to the input audio.
  273. Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
  274. (and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
  275. effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
  276. sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
  277. original signal and the reflection is the @code{delay}, and the
  278. loudness of the reflected signal is the @code{decay}.
  279. Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
  280. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  281. @table @option
  282. @item in_gain
  283. Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.6}.
  284. @item out_gain
  285. Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.3}.
  286. @item delays
  287. Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
  288. separated by '|'. Allowed range for each @code{delay} is @code{(0 - 90000.0]}.
  289. Default is @code{1000}.
  290. @item decays
  291. Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by '|'.
  292. Allowed range for each @code{decay} is @code{(0 - 1.0]}.
  293. Default is @code{0.5}.
  294. @end table
  295. @subsection Examples
  296. @itemize
  297. @item
  298. Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
  299. @example
  300. aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4
  301. @end example
  302. @item
  303. If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
  304. @example
  305. aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4
  306. @end example
  307. @item
  308. A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
  309. @example
  310. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
  311. @end example
  312. @item
  313. Same as above but with one more mountain:
  314. @example
  315. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
  316. @end example
  317. @end itemize
  318. @section aeval
  319. Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
  320. This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
  321. which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
  322. It accepts the following parameters:
  323. @table @option
  324. @item exprs
  325. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
  326. the number of input channels is greater than the number of
  327. expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
  328. output channels.
  329. @item channel_layout, c
  330. Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
  331. specified by the number of expressions. If set to @samp{same}, it will
  332. use by default the same input channel layout.
  333. @end table
  334. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants and functions:
  335. @table @option
  336. @item ch
  337. channel number of the current expression
  338. @item n
  339. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  340. @item s
  341. sample rate
  342. @item t
  343. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
  344. @item nb_in_channels
  345. @item nb_out_channels
  346. input and output number of channels
  347. @item val(CH)
  348. the value of input channel with number @var{CH}
  349. @end table
  350. Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
  351. dedicated filter.
  352. @subsection Examples
  353. @itemize
  354. @item
  355. Half volume:
  356. @example
  357. aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
  358. @end example
  359. @item
  360. Invert phase of the second channel:
  361. @example
  362. aeval=val(0)|-val(1)
  363. @end example
  364. @end itemize
  365. @section afade
  366. Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
  367. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  368. @table @option
  369. @item type, t
  370. Specify the effect type, can be either @code{in} for fade-in, or
  371. @code{out} for a fade-out effect. Default is @code{in}.
  372. @item start_sample, ss
  373. Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
  374. effect. Default is 0.
  375. @item nb_samples, ns
  376. Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
  377. the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  378. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  379. the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
  380. @item start_time, st
  381. Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
  382. The value must be specified as a time duration; see
  383. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  384. for the accepted syntax.
  385. If set this option is used instead of @var{start_sample}.
  386. @item duration, d
  387. Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
  388. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  389. for the accepted syntax.
  390. At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  391. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  392. the output audio will be silence.
  393. By default the duration is determined by @var{nb_samples}.
  394. If set this option is used instead of @var{nb_samples}.
  395. @item curve
  396. Set curve for fade transition.
  397. It accepts the following values:
  398. @table @option
  399. @item tri
  400. select triangular, linear slope (default)
  401. @item qsin
  402. select quarter of sine wave
  403. @item hsin
  404. select half of sine wave
  405. @item esin
  406. select exponential sine wave
  407. @item log
  408. select logarithmic
  409. @item par
  410. select inverted parabola
  411. @item qua
  412. select quadratic
  413. @item cub
  414. select cubic
  415. @item squ
  416. select square root
  417. @item cbr
  418. select cubic root
  419. @end table
  420. @end table
  421. @subsection Examples
  422. @itemize
  423. @item
  424. Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
  425. @example
  426. afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15
  427. @end example
  428. @item
  429. Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
  430. @example
  431. afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
  432. @end example
  433. @end itemize
  434. @anchor{aformat}
  435. @section aformat
  436. Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
  437. negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
  438. It accepts the following parameters:
  439. @table @option
  440. @item sample_fmts
  441. A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.
  442. @item sample_rates
  443. A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.
  444. @item channel_layouts
  445. A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.
  446. See @ref{channel layout syntax,,the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  447. for the required syntax.
  448. @end table
  449. If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
  450. Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
  451. @example
  452. aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
  453. @end example
  454. @section allpass
  455. Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
  456. @var{frequency}, and filter-width @var{width}.
  457. An all-pass filter changes the audio's frequency to phase relationship
  458. without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
  459. The filter accepts the following options:
  460. @table @option
  461. @item frequency, f
  462. Set frequency in Hz.
  463. @item width_type
  464. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  465. @table @option
  466. @item h
  467. Hz
  468. @item q
  469. Q-Factor
  470. @item o
  471. octave
  472. @item s
  473. slope
  474. @end table
  475. @item width, w
  476. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  477. @end table
  478. @section amerge
  479. Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
  480. The filter accepts the following options:
  481. @table @option
  482. @item inputs
  483. Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
  484. @end table
  485. If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
  486. the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
  487. will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
  488. disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
  489. the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
  490. the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
  491. channels.
  492. For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
  493. is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
  494. following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
  495. first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
  496. On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
  497. in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
  498. arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
  499. All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
  500. If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
  501. shortest.
  502. @subsection Examples
  503. @itemize
  504. @item
  505. Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
  506. @example
  507. amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
  508. @end example
  509. @item
  510. Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in @file{input.mkv}:
  511. @example
  512. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
  513. @end example
  514. @end itemize
  515. @section amix
  516. Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
  517. Note that this filter only supports float samples (the @var{amerge}
  518. and @var{pan} audio filters support many formats). If the @var{amix}
  519. input has integer samples then @ref{aresample} will be automatically
  520. inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
  521. For example
  522. @example
  523. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
  524. @end example
  525. will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
  526. first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
  527. It accepts the following parameters:
  528. @table @option
  529. @item inputs
  530. The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  531. @item duration
  532. How to determine the end-of-stream.
  533. @table @option
  534. @item longest
  535. The duration of the longest input. (default)
  536. @item shortest
  537. The duration of the shortest input.
  538. @item first
  539. The duration of the first input.
  540. @end table
  541. @item dropout_transition
  542. The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
  543. stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
  544. @end table
  545. @section anull
  546. Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
  547. @section apad
  548. Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
  549. This can be used together with @command{ffmpeg} @option{-shortest} to
  550. extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
  551. A description of the accepted options follows.
  552. @table @option
  553. @item packet_size
  554. Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
  555. @item pad_len
  556. Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
  557. value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
  558. exclusive with @option{whole_len}.
  559. @item whole_len
  560. Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
  561. the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
  562. the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
  563. with @option{pad_len}.
  564. @end table
  565. If neither the @option{pad_len} nor the @option{whole_len} option is
  566. set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
  567. indefinitely.
  568. @subsection Examples
  569. @itemize
  570. @item
  571. Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
  572. @example
  573. apad=pad_len=1024
  574. @end example
  575. @item
  576. Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
  577. the input with silence if required:
  578. @example
  579. apad=whole_len=10000
  580. @end example
  581. @item
  582. Use @command{ffmpeg} to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
  583. video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
  584. until the end in the output file when using the @option{shortest}
  585. option:
  586. @example
  587. ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
  588. @end example
  589. @end itemize
  590. @section aphaser
  591. Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
  592. A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
  593. The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
  594. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  595. @table @option
  596. @item in_gain
  597. Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
  598. @item out_gain
  599. Set output gain. Default is 0.74
  600. @item delay
  601. Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
  602. @item decay
  603. Set decay. Default is 0.4.
  604. @item speed
  605. Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
  606. @item type
  607. Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
  608. It accepts the following values:
  609. @table @samp
  610. @item triangular, t
  611. @item sinusoidal, s
  612. @end table
  613. @end table
  614. @anchor{aresample}
  615. @section aresample
  616. Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
  617. libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
  618. automatically convert between its input and output.
  619. This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
  620. the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
  621. timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
  622. The filter accepts the syntax
  623. [@var{sample_rate}:]@var{resampler_options}, where @var{sample_rate}
  624. expresses a sample rate and @var{resampler_options} is a list of
  625. @var{key}=@var{value} pairs, separated by ":". See the
  626. ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
  627. @subsection Examples
  628. @itemize
  629. @item
  630. Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
  631. @example
  632. aresample=44100
  633. @end example
  634. @item
  635. Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
  636. samples per second compensation:
  637. @example
  638. aresample=async=1000
  639. @end example
  640. @end itemize
  641. @section asetnsamples
  642. Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
  643. The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
  644. the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
  645. signal its end.
  646. The filter accepts the following options:
  647. @table @option
  648. @item nb_out_samples, n
  649. Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
  650. intended as the number of samples @emph{per each channel}.
  651. Default value is 1024.
  652. @item pad, p
  653. If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
  654. that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
  655. previous ones. Default value is 1.
  656. @end table
  657. For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
  658. disable padding for the last frame, use:
  659. @example
  660. asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
  661. @end example
  662. @section asetrate
  663. Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
  664. This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
  665. The filter accepts the following options:
  666. @table @option
  667. @item sample_rate, r
  668. Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
  669. @end table
  670. @section ashowinfo
  671. Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
  672. The input audio is not modified.
  673. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  674. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  675. The following values are shown in the output:
  676. @table @option
  677. @item n
  678. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  679. @item pts
  680. The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
  681. depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/@var{sample_rate}.
  682. @item pts_time
  683. The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
  684. @item pos
  685. position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
  686. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
  687. @item fmt
  688. The sample format.
  689. @item chlayout
  690. The channel layout.
  691. @item rate
  692. The sample rate for the audio frame.
  693. @item nb_samples
  694. The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
  695. @item checksum
  696. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
  697. audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
  698. @item plane_checksums
  699. A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
  700. @end table
  701. @section astats
  702. Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
  703. Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
  704. where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
  705. It accepts the following option:
  706. @table @option
  707. @item length
  708. Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
  709. Default is @code{0.05} (50 miliseconds). Allowed range is @code{[0.1 - 10]}.
  710. @end table
  711. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  712. @table @option
  713. @item DC offset
  714. Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
  715. @item Min level
  716. Minimal sample level.
  717. @item Max level
  718. Maximal sample level.
  719. @item Peak level dB
  720. @item RMS level dB
  721. Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
  722. @item RMS peak dB
  723. @item RMS trough dB
  724. Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
  725. @item Crest factor
  726. Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
  727. @item Flat factor
  728. Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
  729. (i.e. either @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}).
  730. @item Peak count
  731. Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
  732. @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}.
  733. @end table
  734. @section astreamsync
  735. Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
  736. The filter accepts the following options:
  737. @table @option
  738. @item expr, e
  739. Set the expression deciding which stream should be
  740. forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
  741. the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
  742. the following variables:
  743. @table @var
  744. @item b1 b2
  745. number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
  746. @item s1 s2
  747. number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
  748. @item t1 t2
  749. current timestamp of each stream
  750. @end table
  751. The default value is @code{t1-t2}, which means to always forward the stream
  752. that has a smaller timestamp.
  753. @end table
  754. @subsection Examples
  755. Stress-test @code{amerge} by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
  756. input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
  757. @example
  758. amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
  759. [a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
  760. [a2] [b2] amerge
  761. @end example
  762. @section asyncts
  763. Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
  764. dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
  765. This filter is not built by default, please use @ref{aresample} to do squeezing/stretching.
  766. It accepts the following parameters:
  767. @table @option
  768. @item compensate
  769. Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
  770. by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
  771. @item min_delta
  772. The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
  773. adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
  774. sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
  775. @item max_comp
  776. The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
  777. The default value is 500.
  778. @item first_pts
  779. Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
  780. rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
  781. no assumption is made about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or
  782. trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
  783. silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
  784. with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
  785. @end table
  786. @section atempo
  787. Adjust audio tempo.
  788. The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
  789. specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
  790. be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
  791. @subsection Examples
  792. @itemize
  793. @item
  794. Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
  795. @example
  796. atempo=0.8
  797. @end example
  798. @item
  799. To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
  800. @example
  801. atempo=1.25
  802. @end example
  803. @end itemize
  804. @section atrim
  805. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  806. It accepts the following parameters:
  807. @table @option
  808. @item start
  809. Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
  810. sample with the timestamp @var{start} will be the first sample in the output.
  811. @item end
  812. Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
  813. audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be
  814. the last sample in the output.
  815. @item start_pts
  816. Same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
  817. instead of seconds.
  818. @item end_pts
  819. Same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
  820. of seconds.
  821. @item duration
  822. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  823. @item start_sample
  824. The number of the first sample that should be output.
  825. @item end_sample
  826. The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
  827. @end table
  828. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  829. duration specifications; see
  830. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}.
  831. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  832. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
  833. samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
  834. give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
  835. zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
  836. to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
  837. atrim filter.
  838. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  839. keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  840. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
  841. filters.
  842. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  843. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  844. Examples:
  845. @itemize
  846. @item
  847. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  848. @example
  849. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
  850. @end example
  851. @item
  852. Keep only the first 1000 samples:
  853. @example
  854. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
  855. @end example
  856. @end itemize
  857. @section bandpass
  858. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
  859. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width width.
  860. The @var{csg} option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
  861. instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
  862. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  863. The filter accepts the following options:
  864. @table @option
  865. @item frequency, f
  866. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  867. @item csg
  868. Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
  869. @item width_type
  870. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  871. @table @option
  872. @item h
  873. Hz
  874. @item q
  875. Q-Factor
  876. @item o
  877. octave
  878. @item s
  879. slope
  880. @end table
  881. @item width, w
  882. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  883. @end table
  884. @section bandreject
  885. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
  886. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width @var{width}.
  887. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  888. The filter accepts the following options:
  889. @table @option
  890. @item frequency, f
  891. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  892. @item width_type
  893. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  894. @table @option
  895. @item h
  896. Hz
  897. @item q
  898. Q-Factor
  899. @item o
  900. octave
  901. @item s
  902. slope
  903. @end table
  904. @item width, w
  905. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  906. @end table
  907. @section bass
  908. Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  909. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  910. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  911. The filter accepts the following options:
  912. @table @option
  913. @item gain, g
  914. Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
  915. (for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
  916. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  917. @item frequency, f
  918. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  919. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  920. The default value is @code{100} Hz.
  921. @item width_type
  922. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  923. @table @option
  924. @item h
  925. Hz
  926. @item q
  927. Q-Factor
  928. @item o
  929. octave
  930. @item s
  931. slope
  932. @end table
  933. @item width, w
  934. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  935. @end table
  936. @section biquad
  937. Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
  938. Where @var{b0}, @var{b1}, @var{b2} and @var{a0}, @var{a1}, @var{a2}
  939. are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
  940. @section bs2b
  941. Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
  942. stereo audio records.
  943. It accepts the following parameters:
  944. @table @option
  945. @item profile
  946. Pre-defined crossfeed level.
  947. @table @option
  948. @item default
  949. Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
  950. @item cmoy
  951. Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
  952. @item jmeier
  953. Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
  954. @end table
  955. @item fcut
  956. Cut frequency (in Hz).
  957. @item feed
  958. Feed level (in Hz).
  959. @end table
  960. @section channelmap
  961. Remap input channels to new locations.
  962. It accepts the following parameters:
  963. @table @option
  964. @item channel_layout
  965. The channel layout of the output stream.
  966. @item map
  967. Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  968. mappings, each in the @code{@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}} or
  969. @var{in_channel} form. @var{in_channel} can be either the name of the input
  970. channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
  971. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
  972. channel layout. If @var{out_channel} is not given then it is implicitly an
  973. index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
  974. @end table
  975. If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
  976. output channels, preserving indices.
  977. For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
  978. @example
  979. ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
  980. @end example
  981. will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
  982. the input.
  983. To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order
  984. @example
  985. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
  986. @end example
  987. @section channelsplit
  988. Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
  989. It accepts the following parameters:
  990. @table @option
  991. @item channel_layout
  992. The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
  993. @end table
  994. For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
  995. @example
  996. ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
  997. @end example
  998. will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
  999. the left channel and the other the right channel.
  1000. Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
  1001. @example
  1002. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
  1003. 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
  1004. -map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
  1005. front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
  1006. side_right.wav
  1007. @end example
  1008. @section compand
  1009. Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.
  1010. It accepts the following parameters:
  1011. @table @option
  1012. @item attacks
  1013. @item decays
  1014. A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
  1015. of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. @var{attacks} refers to
  1016. increase of volume and @var{decays} refers to decrease of volume. For most
  1017. situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
  1018. shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
  1019. loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
  1020. a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
  1021. @item points
  1022. A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
  1023. maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
  1024. the following syntax: @code{x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|....} or
  1025. @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....}
  1026. The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
  1027. does not have to be monotonically rising. The point @code{0/0} is assumed but
  1028. may be overridden (by @code{0/out-dBn}). Typical values for the transfer
  1029. function are @code{-70/-70|-60/-20}.
  1030. @item soft-knee
  1031. Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
  1032. @item gain
  1033. Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
  1034. function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
  1035. It defaults to 0.
  1036. @item volume
  1037. Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
  1038. starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
  1039. example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
  1040. companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
  1041. quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
  1042. @item delay
  1043. Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
  1044. delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
  1045. approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
  1046. operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
  1047. @end table
  1048. @subsection Examples
  1049. @itemize
  1050. @item
  1051. Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
  1052. noisy environment:
  1053. @example
  1054. compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
  1055. @end example
  1056. @item
  1057. A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
  1058. @example
  1059. compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
  1060. @end example
  1061. @item
  1062. Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
  1063. than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
  1064. @example
  1065. compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
  1066. @end example
  1067. @end itemize
  1068. @section earwax
  1069. Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
  1070. This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
  1071. so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
  1072. inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
  1073. the listener (standard for speakers).
  1074. Ported from SoX.
  1075. @section equalizer
  1076. Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
  1077. filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
  1078. be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
  1079. filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
  1080. In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
  1081. be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
  1082. The filter accepts the following options:
  1083. @table @option
  1084. @item frequency, f
  1085. Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.
  1086. @item width_type
  1087. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1088. @table @option
  1089. @item h
  1090. Hz
  1091. @item q
  1092. Q-Factor
  1093. @item o
  1094. octave
  1095. @item s
  1096. slope
  1097. @end table
  1098. @item width, w
  1099. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1100. @item gain, g
  1101. Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
  1102. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1103. @end table
  1104. @subsection Examples
  1105. @itemize
  1106. @item
  1107. Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
  1108. @example
  1109. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
  1110. @end example
  1111. @item
  1112. Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
  1113. @example
  1114. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
  1115. @end example
  1116. @end itemize
  1117. @section flanger
  1118. Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
  1119. The filter accepts the following options:
  1120. @table @option
  1121. @item delay
  1122. Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
  1123. @item depth
  1124. Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
  1125. @item regen
  1126. Set percentage regeneneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
  1127. Default value is 0.
  1128. @item width
  1129. Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
  1130. Default valu is 71.
  1131. @item speed
  1132. Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
  1133. @item shape
  1134. Set swept wave shape, can be @var{triangular} or @var{sinusoidal}.
  1135. Default value is @var{sinusoidal}.
  1136. @item phase
  1137. Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
  1138. Default value is 25.
  1139. @item interp
  1140. Set delay-line interpolation, @var{linear} or @var{quadratic}.
  1141. Default is @var{linear}.
  1142. @end table
  1143. @section highpass
  1144. Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1145. The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
  1146. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1147. The filter accepts the following options:
  1148. @table @option
  1149. @item frequency, f
  1150. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
  1151. @item poles, p
  1152. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1153. @item width_type
  1154. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1155. @table @option
  1156. @item h
  1157. Hz
  1158. @item q
  1159. Q-Factor
  1160. @item o
  1161. octave
  1162. @item s
  1163. slope
  1164. @end table
  1165. @item width, w
  1166. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1167. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1168. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1169. @end table
  1170. @section join
  1171. Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
  1172. It accepts the following parameters:
  1173. @table @option
  1174. @item inputs
  1175. The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
  1176. @item channel_layout
  1177. The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
  1178. @item map
  1179. Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  1180. mappings, each in the @code{@var{input_idx}.@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}}
  1181. form. @var{input_idx} is the 0-based index of the input stream. @var{in_channel}
  1182. can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
  1183. index in the specified input stream. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output
  1184. channel.
  1185. @end table
  1186. The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
  1187. explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
  1188. and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
  1189. Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
  1190. @example
  1191. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
  1192. @end example
  1193. Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
  1194. @example
  1195. ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
  1196. 'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
  1197. out
  1198. @end example
  1199. @section ladspa
  1200. Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.
  1201. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1202. @code{--enable-ladspa}.
  1203. @table @option
  1204. @item file, f
  1205. Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
  1206. variable @env{LADSPA_PATH} is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
  1207. each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
  1208. @env{LADSPA_PATH}, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
  1209. this order: @file{HOME/.ladspa/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/ladspa/},
  1210. @file{/usr/lib/ladspa/}.
  1211. @item plugin, p
  1212. Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
  1213. one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
  1214. will list all available plugins within the specified library.
  1215. @item controls, c
  1216. Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
  1217. values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
  1218. threshold or gain).
  1219. Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
  1220. c0=@var{value0}|c1=@var{value1}|c2=@var{value2}|..., where
  1221. @var{valuei} is the value set on the @var{i}-th control.
  1222. If @option{controls} is set to @code{help}, all available controls and
  1223. their valid ranges are printed.
  1224. @item sample_rate, s
  1225. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
  1226. zero inputs.
  1227. @item nb_samples, n
  1228. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
  1229. is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1230. @item duration, d
  1231. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1232. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1233. for the accepted syntax.
  1234. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
  1235. as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
  1236. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1237. supposed to be generated forever.
  1238. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1239. @end table
  1240. @subsection Examples
  1241. @itemize
  1242. @item
  1243. List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
  1244. @example
  1245. ladspa=file=amp
  1246. @end example
  1247. @item
  1248. List all available controls and their valid ranges for @code{vcf_notch}
  1249. plugin from @code{VCF} library:
  1250. @example
  1251. ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
  1252. @end example
  1253. @item
  1254. Simulate low quality audio equipment using @code{Computer Music Toolkit} (CMT)
  1255. plugin library:
  1256. @example
  1257. ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
  1258. @end example
  1259. @item
  1260. Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
  1261. (Tom's Audio Processing plugins):
  1262. @example
  1263. ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
  1264. @end example
  1265. @item
  1266. Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
  1267. @example
  1268. ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
  1269. @end example
  1270. @item
  1271. Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin @code{C* Click - Metronome} from the
  1272. @code{C* Audio Plugin Suite} (CAPS) library:
  1273. @example
  1274. ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
  1275. @end example
  1276. @item
  1277. Apply @code{C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser} effect:
  1278. @example
  1279. ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
  1280. @end example
  1281. @end itemize
  1282. @subsection Commands
  1283. This filter supports the following commands:
  1284. @table @option
  1285. @item cN
  1286. Modify the @var{N}-th control value.
  1287. If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
  1288. @end table
  1289. @section lowpass
  1290. Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1291. The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
  1292. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1293. The filter accepts the following options:
  1294. @table @option
  1295. @item frequency, f
  1296. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
  1297. @item poles, p
  1298. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1299. @item width_type
  1300. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1301. @table @option
  1302. @item h
  1303. Hz
  1304. @item q
  1305. Q-Factor
  1306. @item o
  1307. octave
  1308. @item s
  1309. slope
  1310. @end table
  1311. @item width, w
  1312. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1313. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1314. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1315. @end table
  1316. @section pan
  1317. Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
  1318. channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
  1319. This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
  1320. stream.
  1321. The filter accepts parameters of the form:
  1322. "@var{l}|@var{outdef}|@var{outdef}|..."
  1323. @table @option
  1324. @item l
  1325. output channel layout or number of channels
  1326. @item outdef
  1327. output channel specification, of the form:
  1328. "@var{out_name}=[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}[+[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}...]"
  1329. @item out_name
  1330. output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
  1331. number (c0, c1, etc.)
  1332. @item gain
  1333. multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
  1334. @item in_name
  1335. input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
  1336. named and numbered input channels
  1337. @end table
  1338. If the `=' in a channel specification is replaced by `<', then the gains for
  1339. that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
  1340. avoiding clipping noise.
  1341. @subsection Mixing examples
  1342. For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
  1343. factor for the left channel:
  1344. @example
  1345. pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
  1346. @end example
  1347. A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
  1348. 7-channels surround:
  1349. @example
  1350. pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
  1351. @end example
  1352. Note that @command{ffmpeg} integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
  1353. that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
  1354. needs.
  1355. @subsection Remapping examples
  1356. The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
  1357. @itemize
  1358. @item gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
  1359. @item only one input per channel output,
  1360. @end itemize
  1361. If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
  1362. channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
  1363. remapping.
  1364. For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
  1365. dropping the extra channels:
  1366. @example
  1367. pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"
  1368. @end example
  1369. Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
  1370. and keep the input channel layout:
  1371. @example
  1372. pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"
  1373. @end example
  1374. If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
  1375. still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
  1376. @example
  1377. pan="stereo|c1=c1"
  1378. @end example
  1379. Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
  1380. front left and right:
  1381. @example
  1382. pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"
  1383. @end example
  1384. @section replaygain
  1385. ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
  1386. outputs it unchanged.
  1387. At end of filtering it displays @code{track_gain} and @code{track_peak}.
  1388. @section resample
  1389. Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
  1390. not meant to be used directly.
  1391. @section silencedetect
  1392. Detect silence in an audio stream.
  1393. This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
  1394. or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
  1395. minimum detected noise duration.
  1396. The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
  1397. The filter accepts the following options:
  1398. @table @option
  1399. @item duration, d
  1400. Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
  1401. @item noise, n
  1402. Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
  1403. specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
  1404. @end table
  1405. @subsection Examples
  1406. @itemize
  1407. @item
  1408. Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
  1409. @example
  1410. silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
  1411. @end example
  1412. @item
  1413. Complete example with @command{ffmpeg} to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
  1414. tolerance in @file{silence.mp3}:
  1415. @example
  1416. ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
  1417. @end example
  1418. @end itemize
  1419. @section silenceremove
  1420. Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
  1421. The filter accepts the following options:
  1422. @table @option
  1423. @item start_periods
  1424. This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
  1425. the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
  1426. beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
  1427. finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
  1428. the @var{start_periods} will be @code{1} but it can be increased to higher
  1429. values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
  1430. Default value is @code{0}.
  1431. @item start_duration
  1432. Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
  1433. trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
  1434. as silence and trimmed off. Default value is @code{0}.
  1435. @item start_threshold
  1436. This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
  1437. audio, a value of @code{0} may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
  1438. you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
  1439. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1440. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1441. @item stop_periods
  1442. Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
  1443. To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a @var{stop_periods}
  1444. that is negative. This value is then threated as a positive value and is
  1445. used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
  1446. @var{start_periods}, making it suitable for removing periods of silence
  1447. in the middle of the audio.
  1448. Default value is @code{0}.
  1449. @item stop_duration
  1450. Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
  1451. more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
  1452. the audio.
  1453. Default value is @code{0}.
  1454. @item stop_threshold
  1455. This is the same as @option{start_threshold} but for trimming silence from
  1456. the end of audio.
  1457. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
  1458. or amplitude ratio. Default value is @code{0}.
  1459. @item leave_silence
  1460. This indicate that @var{stop_duration} length of audio should be left intact
  1461. at the beginning of each period of silence.
  1462. For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
  1463. to remove the pauses completely. Default value is @code{0}.
  1464. @end table
  1465. @subsection Examples
  1466. @itemize
  1467. @item
  1468. The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
  1469. that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
  1470. pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
  1471. @example
  1472. silenceremove=1:5:0.02
  1473. @end example
  1474. @end itemize
  1475. @section treble
  1476. Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  1477. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  1478. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  1479. The filter accepts the following options:
  1480. @table @option
  1481. @item gain, g
  1482. Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
  1483. Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
  1484. to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1485. @item frequency, f
  1486. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  1487. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  1488. The default value is @code{3000} Hz.
  1489. @item width_type
  1490. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1491. @table @option
  1492. @item h
  1493. Hz
  1494. @item q
  1495. Q-Factor
  1496. @item o
  1497. octave
  1498. @item s
  1499. slope
  1500. @end table
  1501. @item width, w
  1502. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  1503. @end table
  1504. @section volume
  1505. Adjust the input audio volume.
  1506. It accepts the following parameters:
  1507. @table @option
  1508. @item volume
  1509. Set audio volume expression.
  1510. Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
  1511. The output audio volume is given by the relation:
  1512. @example
  1513. @var{output_volume} = @var{volume} * @var{input_volume}
  1514. @end example
  1515. The default value for @var{volume} is "1.0".
  1516. @item precision
  1517. This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
  1518. It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
  1519. precision of the volume scaling.
  1520. @table @option
  1521. @item fixed
  1522. 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
  1523. @item float
  1524. 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
  1525. @item double
  1526. 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
  1527. @end table
  1528. @item replaygain
  1529. Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
  1530. @table @option
  1531. @item drop
  1532. Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
  1533. @item ignore
  1534. Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
  1535. @item track
  1536. Prefer the track gain, if present.
  1537. @item album
  1538. Prefer the album gain, if present.
  1539. @end table
  1540. @item replaygain_preamp
  1541. Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
  1542. Default value for @var{replaygain_preamp} is 0.0.
  1543. @item eval
  1544. Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
  1545. It accepts the following values:
  1546. @table @samp
  1547. @item once
  1548. only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
  1549. when the @samp{volume} command is sent
  1550. @item frame
  1551. evaluate expression for each incoming frame
  1552. @end table
  1553. Default value is @samp{once}.
  1554. @end table
  1555. The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
  1556. @table @option
  1557. @item n
  1558. frame number (starting at zero)
  1559. @item nb_channels
  1560. number of channels
  1561. @item nb_consumed_samples
  1562. number of samples consumed by the filter
  1563. @item nb_samples
  1564. number of samples in the current frame
  1565. @item pos
  1566. original frame position in the file
  1567. @item pts
  1568. frame PTS
  1569. @item sample_rate
  1570. sample rate
  1571. @item startpts
  1572. PTS at start of stream
  1573. @item startt
  1574. time at start of stream
  1575. @item t
  1576. frame time
  1577. @item tb
  1578. timestamp timebase
  1579. @item volume
  1580. last set volume value
  1581. @end table
  1582. Note that when @option{eval} is set to @samp{once} only the
  1583. @var{sample_rate} and @var{tb} variables are available, all other
  1584. variables will evaluate to NAN.
  1585. @subsection Commands
  1586. This filter supports the following commands:
  1587. @table @option
  1588. @item volume
  1589. Modify the volume expression.
  1590. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  1591. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  1592. value.
  1593. @item replaygain_noclip
  1594. Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
  1595. Default value for @var{replaygain_noclip} is 1.
  1596. @end table
  1597. @subsection Examples
  1598. @itemize
  1599. @item
  1600. Halve the input audio volume:
  1601. @example
  1602. volume=volume=0.5
  1603. volume=volume=1/2
  1604. volume=volume=-6.0206dB
  1605. @end example
  1606. In all the above example the named key for @option{volume} can be
  1607. omitted, for example like in:
  1608. @example
  1609. volume=0.5
  1610. @end example
  1611. @item
  1612. Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:
  1613. @example
  1614. volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed
  1615. @end example
  1616. @item
  1617. Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:
  1618. @example
  1619. volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame
  1620. @end example
  1621. @end itemize
  1622. @section volumedetect
  1623. Detect the volume of the input video.
  1624. The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
  1625. the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
  1626. In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
  1627. volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
  1628. registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
  1629. the samples).
  1630. All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
  1631. @subsection Examples
  1632. Here is an excerpt of the output:
  1633. @example
  1634. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
  1635. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
  1636. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
  1637. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
  1638. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
  1639. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
  1640. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
  1641. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
  1642. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
  1643. @end example
  1644. It means that:
  1645. @itemize
  1646. @item
  1647. The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
  1648. @item
  1649. The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
  1650. @item
  1651. There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
  1652. @end itemize
  1653. In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
  1654. raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
  1655. @c man end AUDIO FILTERS
  1656. @chapter Audio Sources
  1657. @c man begin AUDIO SOURCES
  1658. Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
  1659. @section abuffer
  1660. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  1661. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  1662. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h}.
  1663. It accepts the following parameters:
  1664. @table @option
  1665. @item time_base
  1666. The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
  1667. either a floating-point number or in @var{numerator}/@var{denominator} form.
  1668. @item sample_rate
  1669. The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
  1670. @item sample_fmt
  1671. The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
  1672. Either a sample format name or its corresponging integer representation from
  1673. the enum AVSampleFormat in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}
  1674. @item channel_layout
  1675. The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
  1676. Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
  1677. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} or its corresponding integer representation
  1678. from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}
  1679. @item channels
  1680. The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
  1681. If both @var{channels} and @var{channel_layout} are specified, then they
  1682. must be consistent.
  1683. @end table
  1684. @subsection Examples
  1685. @example
  1686. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
  1687. @end example
  1688. will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
  1689. Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
  1690. 6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
  1691. equivalent to:
  1692. @example
  1693. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
  1694. @end example
  1695. @section aevalsrc
  1696. Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
  1697. This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
  1698. channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
  1699. audio signal.
  1700. This source accepts the following options:
  1701. @table @option
  1702. @item exprs
  1703. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
  1704. @option{channel_layout} option is not specified, the selected channel layout
  1705. depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
  1706. specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
  1707. @item channel_layout, c
  1708. Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
  1709. must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
  1710. @item duration, d
  1711. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
  1712. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  1713. for the accepted syntax.
  1714. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
  1715. duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
  1716. complete frame.
  1717. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1718. supposed to be generated forever.
  1719. @item nb_samples, n
  1720. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
  1721. default to 1024.
  1722. @item sample_rate, s
  1723. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
  1724. @end table
  1725. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants:
  1726. @table @option
  1727. @item n
  1728. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  1729. @item t
  1730. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
  1731. @item s
  1732. sample rate
  1733. @end table
  1734. @subsection Examples
  1735. @itemize
  1736. @item
  1737. Generate silence:
  1738. @example
  1739. aevalsrc=0
  1740. @end example
  1741. @item
  1742. Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
  1743. 8000 Hz:
  1744. @example
  1745. aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
  1746. @end example
  1747. @item
  1748. Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
  1749. Center + Back Center) explicitly:
  1750. @example
  1751. aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
  1752. @end example
  1753. @item
  1754. Generate white noise:
  1755. @example
  1756. aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
  1757. @end example
  1758. @item
  1759. Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
  1760. @example
  1761. aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
  1762. @end example
  1763. @item
  1764. Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
  1765. @example
  1766. aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
  1767. @end example
  1768. @end itemize
  1769. @section anullsrc
  1770. The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
  1771. as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
  1772. the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
  1773. synth filter).
  1774. This source accepts the following options:
  1775. @table @option
  1776. @item channel_layout, cl
  1777. Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
  1778. representing a channel layout. The default value of @var{channel_layout}
  1779. is "stereo".
  1780. Check the channel_layout_map definition in
  1781. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} for the mapping between strings and
  1782. channel layout values.
  1783. @item sample_rate, r
  1784. Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
  1785. @item nb_samples, n
  1786. Set the number of samples per requested frames.
  1787. @end table
  1788. @subsection Examples
  1789. @itemize
  1790. @item
  1791. Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
  1792. @example
  1793. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4
  1794. @end example
  1795. @item
  1796. Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
  1797. @example
  1798. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
  1799. @end example
  1800. @end itemize
  1801. All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
  1802. @section flite
  1803. Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
  1804. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1805. @code{--enable-libflite}.
  1806. Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
  1807. The filter accepts the following options:
  1808. @table @option
  1809. @item list_voices
  1810. If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
  1811. immediately. Default value is 0.
  1812. @item nb_samples, n
  1813. Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
  1814. @item textfile
  1815. Set the filename containing the text to speak.
  1816. @item text
  1817. Set the text to speak.
  1818. @item voice, v
  1819. Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
  1820. @code{kal}. See also the @var{list_voices} option.
  1821. @end table
  1822. @subsection Examples
  1823. @itemize
  1824. @item
  1825. Read from file @file{speech.txt}, and synthetize the text using the
  1826. standard flite voice:
  1827. @example
  1828. flite=textfile=speech.txt
  1829. @end example
  1830. @item
  1831. Read the specified text selecting the @code{slt} voice:
  1832. @example
  1833. flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1834. @end example
  1835. @item
  1836. Input text to ffmpeg:
  1837. @example
  1838. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1839. @end example
  1840. @item
  1841. Make @file{ffplay} speak the specified text, using @code{flite} and
  1842. the @code{lavfi} device:
  1843. @example
  1844. ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
  1845. @end example
  1846. @end itemize
  1847. For more information about libflite, check:
  1848. @url{http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/}
  1849. @section sine
  1850. Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
  1851. The audio signal is bit-exact.
  1852. The filter accepts the following options:
  1853. @table @option
  1854. @item frequency, f
  1855. Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
  1856. @item beep_factor, b
  1857. Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency @var{beep_factor} times
  1858. the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
  1859. @item sample_rate, r
  1860. Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
  1861. @item duration, d
  1862. Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
  1863. @item samples_per_frame
  1864. Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
  1865. @end table
  1866. @subsection Examples
  1867. @itemize
  1868. @item
  1869. Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
  1870. @example
  1871. sine
  1872. @end example
  1873. @item
  1874. Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
  1875. @example
  1876. sine=220:4:d=5
  1877. sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
  1878. sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
  1879. @end example
  1880. @end itemize
  1881. @c man end AUDIO SOURCES
  1882. @chapter Audio Sinks
  1883. @c man begin AUDIO SINKS
  1884. Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
  1885. @section abuffersink
  1886. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
  1887. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  1888. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  1889. or the options system.
  1890. It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
  1891. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  1892. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  1893. @section anullsink
  1894. Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
  1895. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  1896. tools.
  1897. @c man end AUDIO SINKS
  1898. @chapter Video Filters
  1899. @c man begin VIDEO FILTERS
  1900. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  1901. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  1902. The configure output will show the video filters included in your
  1903. build.
  1904. Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
  1905. @section alphaextract
  1906. Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
  1907. is especially useful with the @var{alphamerge} filter.
  1908. @section alphamerge
  1909. Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
  1910. grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
  1911. @var{alphaextract} to allow the transmission or storage of frame
  1912. sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha
  1913. channel.
  1914. For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
  1915. and a separate video created with @var{alphaextract}, you might use:
  1916. @example
  1917. movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
  1918. @end example
  1919. Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
  1920. sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
  1921. input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
  1922. pipeline drops frames. If you're trying to apply an image as an
  1923. overlay to a video stream, consider the @var{overlay} filter instead.
  1924. @section ass
  1925. Same as the @ref{subtitles} filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec
  1926. and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
  1927. Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
  1928. This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
  1929. the @ref{subtitles} filter:
  1930. @table @option
  1931. @item shaping
  1932. Set the shaping engine
  1933. Available values are:
  1934. @table @samp
  1935. @item auto
  1936. The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
  1937. @item simple
  1938. Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
  1939. @item complex
  1940. Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
  1941. @end table
  1942. The default is @code{auto}.
  1943. @end table
  1944. @section bbox
  1945. Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
  1946. luminance plane.
  1947. This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
  1948. luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
  1949. The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
  1950. log.
  1951. The filter accepts the following option:
  1952. @table @option
  1953. @item min_val
  1954. Set the minimal luminance value. Default is @code{16}.
  1955. @end table
  1956. @section blackdetect
  1957. Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
  1958. useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
  1959. recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
  1960. duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
  1961. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1962. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1963. The filter accepts the following options:
  1964. @table @option
  1965. @item black_min_duration, d
  1966. Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
  1967. be a non-negative floating point number.
  1968. Default value is 2.0.
  1969. @item picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th
  1970. Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
  1971. Express the minimum value for the ratio:
  1972. @example
  1973. @var{nb_black_pixels} / @var{nb_pixels}
  1974. @end example
  1975. for which a picture is considered black.
  1976. Default value is 0.98.
  1977. @item pixel_black_th, pix_th
  1978. Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
  1979. The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
  1980. pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
  1981. the following equation:
  1982. @example
  1983. @var{absolute_threshold} = @var{luminance_minimum_value} + @var{pixel_black_th} * @var{luminance_range_size}
  1984. @end example
  1985. @var{luminance_range_size} and @var{luminance_minimum_value} depend on
  1986. the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
  1987. formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
  1988. Default value is 0.10.
  1989. @end table
  1990. The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
  1991. value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
  1992. @example
  1993. blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
  1994. @end example
  1995. @section blackframe
  1996. Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
  1997. detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
  1998. the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
  1999. the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
  2000. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  2001. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  2002. It accepts the following parameters:
  2003. @table @option
  2004. @item amount
  2005. The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
  2006. @code{98}.
  2007. @item threshold, thresh
  2008. The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
  2009. @code{32}.
  2010. @end table
  2011. @section blend
  2012. Blend two video frames into each other.
  2013. It takes two input streams and outputs one stream, the first input is the
  2014. "top" layer and second input is "bottom" layer.
  2015. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
  2016. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2017. @table @option
  2018. @item c0_mode
  2019. @item c1_mode
  2020. @item c2_mode
  2021. @item c3_mode
  2022. @item all_mode
  2023. Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2024. of @var{all_mode}. Default value is @code{normal}.
  2025. Available values for component modes are:
  2026. @table @samp
  2027. @item addition
  2028. @item and
  2029. @item average
  2030. @item burn
  2031. @item darken
  2032. @item difference
  2033. @item divide
  2034. @item dodge
  2035. @item exclusion
  2036. @item hardlight
  2037. @item lighten
  2038. @item multiply
  2039. @item negation
  2040. @item normal
  2041. @item or
  2042. @item overlay
  2043. @item phoenix
  2044. @item pinlight
  2045. @item reflect
  2046. @item screen
  2047. @item softlight
  2048. @item subtract
  2049. @item vividlight
  2050. @item xor
  2051. @end table
  2052. @item c0_opacity
  2053. @item c1_opacity
  2054. @item c2_opacity
  2055. @item c3_opacity
  2056. @item all_opacity
  2057. Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2058. of @var{all_opacity}. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
  2059. @item c0_expr
  2060. @item c1_expr
  2061. @item c2_expr
  2062. @item c3_expr
  2063. @item all_expr
  2064. Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  2065. of @var{all_expr}. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
  2066. The expressions can use the following variables:
  2067. @table @option
  2068. @item N
  2069. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  2070. @item X
  2071. @item Y
  2072. the coordinates of the current sample
  2073. @item W
  2074. @item H
  2075. the width and height of currently filtered plane
  2076. @item SW
  2077. @item SH
  2078. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  2079. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  2080. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  2081. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  2082. @item T
  2083. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  2084. @item TOP, A
  2085. Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
  2086. @item BOTTOM, B
  2087. Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
  2088. @end table
  2089. @item shortest
  2090. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  2091. @item repeatlast
  2092. Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
  2093. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
  2094. Default is @code{1}.
  2095. @end table
  2096. @subsection Examples
  2097. @itemize
  2098. @item
  2099. Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
  2100. @example
  2101. blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
  2102. @end example
  2103. @item
  2104. Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
  2105. @example
  2106. blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
  2107. @end example
  2108. @item
  2109. Apply uncover left effect:
  2110. @example
  2111. blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
  2112. @end example
  2113. @item
  2114. Apply uncover down effect:
  2115. @example
  2116. blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
  2117. @end example
  2118. @item
  2119. Apply uncover up-left effect:
  2120. @example
  2121. blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
  2122. @end example
  2123. @end itemize
  2124. @section boxblur
  2125. Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
  2126. It accepts the following parameters:
  2127. @table @option
  2128. @item luma_radius, lr
  2129. @item luma_power, lp
  2130. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2131. @item chroma_power, cp
  2132. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2133. @item alpha_power, ap
  2134. @end table
  2135. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2136. @table @option
  2137. @item luma_radius, lr
  2138. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2139. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2140. Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
  2141. corresponding input plane.
  2142. The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
  2143. greater than the value of the expression @code{min(w,h)/2} for the
  2144. luma and alpha planes, and of @code{min(cw,ch)/2} for the chroma
  2145. planes.
  2146. Default value for @option{luma_radius} is "2". If not specified,
  2147. @option{chroma_radius} and @option{alpha_radius} default to the
  2148. corresponding value set for @option{luma_radius}.
  2149. The expressions can contain the following constants:
  2150. @table @option
  2151. @item w
  2152. @item h
  2153. The input width and height in pixels.
  2154. @item cw
  2155. @item ch
  2156. The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
  2157. @item hsub
  2158. @item vsub
  2159. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  2160. pixel format "yuv422p", @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2161. @end table
  2162. @item luma_power, lp
  2163. @item chroma_power, cp
  2164. @item alpha_power, ap
  2165. Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
  2166. corresponding plane.
  2167. Default value for @option{luma_power} is 2. If not specified,
  2168. @option{chroma_power} and @option{alpha_power} default to the
  2169. corresponding value set for @option{luma_power}.
  2170. A value of 0 will disable the effect.
  2171. @end table
  2172. @subsection Examples
  2173. @itemize
  2174. @item
  2175. Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
  2176. set to 2:
  2177. @example
  2178. boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
  2179. boxblur=2:1
  2180. @end example
  2181. @item
  2182. Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
  2183. @example
  2184. boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0
  2185. @end example
  2186. @item
  2187. Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
  2188. @example
  2189. boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
  2190. @end example
  2191. @end itemize
  2192. @section codecview
  2193. Visualize information exported by some codecs.
  2194. Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
  2195. means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
  2196. @var{export_mvs} flag in the codec @option{flags2} option.
  2197. The filter accepts the following option:
  2198. @table @option
  2199. @item mv
  2200. Set motion vectors to visualize.
  2201. Available flags for @var{mv} are:
  2202. @table @samp
  2203. @item pf
  2204. forward predicted MVs of P-frames
  2205. @item bf
  2206. forward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2207. @item bb
  2208. backward predicted MVs of B-frames
  2209. @end table
  2210. @end table
  2211. @subsection Examples
  2212. @itemize
  2213. @item
  2214. Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using @command{ffplay}:
  2215. @example
  2216. ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
  2217. @end example
  2218. @end itemize
  2219. @section colorbalance
  2220. Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
  2221. The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
  2222. regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
  2223. A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
  2224. value towards the complementary color.
  2225. The filter accepts the following options:
  2226. @table @option
  2227. @item rs
  2228. @item gs
  2229. @item bs
  2230. Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
  2231. @item rm
  2232. @item gm
  2233. @item bm
  2234. Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
  2235. @item rh
  2236. @item gh
  2237. @item bh
  2238. Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
  2239. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2240. @end table
  2241. @subsection Examples
  2242. @itemize
  2243. @item
  2244. Add red color cast to shadows:
  2245. @example
  2246. colorbalance=rs=.3
  2247. @end example
  2248. @end itemize
  2249. @section colorchannelmixer
  2250. Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
  2251. This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
  2252. the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
  2253. modify is red, the output value will be:
  2254. @example
  2255. @var{red}=@var{red}*@var{rr} + @var{blue}*@var{rb} + @var{green}*@var{rg} + @var{alpha}*@var{ra}
  2256. @end example
  2257. The filter accepts the following options:
  2258. @table @option
  2259. @item rr
  2260. @item rg
  2261. @item rb
  2262. @item ra
  2263. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
  2264. Default is @code{1} for @var{rr}, and @code{0} for @var{rg}, @var{rb} and @var{ra}.
  2265. @item gr
  2266. @item gg
  2267. @item gb
  2268. @item ga
  2269. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
  2270. Default is @code{1} for @var{gg}, and @code{0} for @var{gr}, @var{gb} and @var{ga}.
  2271. @item br
  2272. @item bg
  2273. @item bb
  2274. @item ba
  2275. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
  2276. Default is @code{1} for @var{bb}, and @code{0} for @var{br}, @var{bg} and @var{ba}.
  2277. @item ar
  2278. @item ag
  2279. @item ab
  2280. @item aa
  2281. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
  2282. Default is @code{1} for @var{aa}, and @code{0} for @var{ar}, @var{ag} and @var{ab}.
  2283. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-2.0, 2.0]}.
  2284. @end table
  2285. @subsection Examples
  2286. @itemize
  2287. @item
  2288. Convert source to grayscale:
  2289. @example
  2290. colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
  2291. @end example
  2292. @item
  2293. Simulate sepia tones:
  2294. @example
  2295. colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
  2296. @end example
  2297. @end itemize
  2298. @section colormatrix
  2299. Convert color matrix.
  2300. The filter accepts the following options:
  2301. @table @option
  2302. @item src
  2303. @item dst
  2304. Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
  2305. specified.
  2306. The accepted values are:
  2307. @table @samp
  2308. @item bt709
  2309. BT.709
  2310. @item bt601
  2311. BT.601
  2312. @item smpte240m
  2313. SMPTE-240M
  2314. @item fcc
  2315. FCC
  2316. @end table
  2317. @end table
  2318. For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
  2319. @example
  2320. colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
  2321. @end example
  2322. @section copy
  2323. Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
  2324. testing purposes.
  2325. @section crop
  2326. Crop the input video to given dimensions.
  2327. It accepts the following parameters:
  2328. @table @option
  2329. @item w, out_w
  2330. The width of the output video. It defaults to @code{iw}.
  2331. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2332. configuration.
  2333. @item h, out_h
  2334. The height of the output video. It defaults to @code{ih}.
  2335. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2336. configuration.
  2337. @item x
  2338. The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
  2339. video. It defaults to @code{(in_w-out_w)/2}.
  2340. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2341. @item y
  2342. The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
  2343. It defaults to @code{(in_h-out_h)/2}.
  2344. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2345. @item keep_aspect
  2346. If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
  2347. to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
  2348. ratio. It defaults to 0.
  2349. @end table
  2350. The @var{out_w}, @var{out_h}, @var{x}, @var{y} parameters are
  2351. expressions containing the following constants:
  2352. @table @option
  2353. @item x
  2354. @item y
  2355. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  2356. each new frame.
  2357. @item in_w
  2358. @item in_h
  2359. The input width and height.
  2360. @item iw
  2361. @item ih
  2362. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  2363. @item out_w
  2364. @item out_h
  2365. The output (cropped) width and height.
  2366. @item ow
  2367. @item oh
  2368. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2369. @item a
  2370. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  2371. @item sar
  2372. input sample aspect ratio
  2373. @item dar
  2374. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  2375. @item hsub
  2376. @item vsub
  2377. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2378. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2379. @item n
  2380. The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  2381. @item pos
  2382. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  2383. @item t
  2384. The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  2385. @end table
  2386. The expression for @var{out_w} may depend on the value of @var{out_h},
  2387. and the expression for @var{out_h} may depend on @var{out_w}, but they
  2388. cannot depend on @var{x} and @var{y}, as @var{x} and @var{y} are
  2389. evaluated after @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2390. The @var{x} and @var{y} parameters specify the expressions for the
  2391. position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
  2392. are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
  2393. is approximated to the nearest valid value.
  2394. The expression for @var{x} may depend on @var{y}, and the expression
  2395. for @var{y} may depend on @var{x}.
  2396. @subsection Examples
  2397. @itemize
  2398. @item
  2399. Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).
  2400. @example
  2401. crop=100:100:12:34
  2402. @end example
  2403. Using named options, the example above becomes:
  2404. @example
  2405. crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34
  2406. @end example
  2407. @item
  2408. Crop the central input area with size 100x100:
  2409. @example
  2410. crop=100:100
  2411. @end example
  2412. @item
  2413. Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:
  2414. @example
  2415. crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h
  2416. @end example
  2417. @item
  2418. Crop the input video central square:
  2419. @example
  2420. crop=out_w=in_h
  2421. crop=in_h
  2422. @end example
  2423. @item
  2424. Delimit the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position
  2425. 100:100 and the right-bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom
  2426. corner of the input image.
  2427. @example
  2428. crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100
  2429. @end example
  2430. @item
  2431. Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from
  2432. the top and bottom borders
  2433. @example
  2434. crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20
  2435. @end example
  2436. @item
  2437. Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:
  2438. @example
  2439. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2
  2440. @end example
  2441. @item
  2442. Crop height for getting Greek harmony:
  2443. @example
  2444. crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w
  2445. @end example
  2446. @item
  2447. Appply trembling effect:
  2448. @example
  2449. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)
  2450. @end example
  2451. @item
  2452. Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:
  2453. @example
  2454. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)"
  2455. @end example
  2456. @item
  2457. Set x depending on the value of y:
  2458. @example
  2459. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)
  2460. @end example
  2461. @end itemize
  2462. @section cropdetect
  2463. Auto-detect the crop size.
  2464. It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
  2465. recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
  2466. correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
  2467. It accepts the following parameters:
  2468. @table @option
  2469. @item limit
  2470. Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
  2471. from nothing (0) to everything (255). An intensity value greater
  2472. to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
  2473. @item round
  2474. The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
  2475. 16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
  2476. get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
  2477. encoding to most video codecs.
  2478. @item reset_count, reset
  2479. Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
  2480. reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
  2481. detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
  2482. This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
  2483. indicates 'never reset', and returns the largest area encountered during
  2484. playback.
  2485. @end table
  2486. @anchor{curves}
  2487. @section curves
  2488. Apply color adjustments using curves.
  2489. This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
  2490. component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by @var{N} key points
  2491. tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
  2492. values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
  2493. the output frame.
  2494. By default, a component curve is defined by the two points @var{(0;0)} and
  2495. @var{(1;1)}. This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
  2496. "adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
  2497. The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
  2498. curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
  2499. smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
  2500. strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their @var{x} and @var{y} values must
  2501. be in the @var{[0;1]} interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
  2502. the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
  2503. If there is no key point defined in @code{x=0}, the filter will automatically
  2504. insert a @var{(0;0)} point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
  2505. in @code{x=1}, the filter will automatically insert a @var{(1;1)} point.
  2506. The filter accepts the following options:
  2507. @table @option
  2508. @item preset
  2509. Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
  2510. to the @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} parameters; in this case, the later
  2511. options takes priority on the preset values.
  2512. Available presets are:
  2513. @table @samp
  2514. @item none
  2515. @item color_negative
  2516. @item cross_process
  2517. @item darker
  2518. @item increase_contrast
  2519. @item lighter
  2520. @item linear_contrast
  2521. @item medium_contrast
  2522. @item negative
  2523. @item strong_contrast
  2524. @item vintage
  2525. @end table
  2526. Default is @code{none}.
  2527. @item master, m
  2528. Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
  2529. is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
  2530. @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} or @option{all} since it acts like a
  2531. post-processing LUT.
  2532. @item red, r
  2533. Set the key points for the red component.
  2534. @item green, g
  2535. Set the key points for the green component.
  2536. @item blue, b
  2537. Set the key points for the blue component.
  2538. @item all
  2539. Set the key points for all components (not including master).
  2540. Can be used in addition to the other key points component
  2541. options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
  2542. @option{all} setting.
  2543. @item psfile
  2544. Specify a Photoshop curves file (@code{.asv}) to import the settings from.
  2545. @end table
  2546. To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
  2547. defined using the following syntax: @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...}.
  2548. @subsection Examples
  2549. @itemize
  2550. @item
  2551. Increase slightly the middle level of blue:
  2552. @example
  2553. curves=blue='0.5/0.58'
  2554. @end example
  2555. @item
  2556. Vintage effect:
  2557. @example
  2558. curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0.50/0.48':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'
  2559. @end example
  2560. Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:
  2561. @table @var
  2562. @item red
  2563. @code{(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)}
  2564. @item green
  2565. @code{(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)}
  2566. @item blue
  2567. @code{(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)}
  2568. @end table
  2569. @item
  2570. The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:
  2571. @example
  2572. curves=preset=vintage
  2573. @end example
  2574. @item
  2575. Or simply:
  2576. @example
  2577. curves=vintage
  2578. @end example
  2579. @item
  2580. Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:
  2581. @example
  2582. curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.asv':green='0.45/0.53'
  2583. @end example
  2584. @end itemize
  2585. @section dctdnoiz
  2586. Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
  2587. This filter is not designed for real time.
  2588. The filter accepts the following options:
  2589. @table @option
  2590. @item sigma, s
  2591. Set the noise sigma constant.
  2592. This @var{sigma} defines a hard threshold of @code{3 * sigma}; every DCT
  2593. coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
  2594. If you need a more advanced filtering, see @option{expr}.
  2595. Default is @code{0}.
  2596. @item overlap
  2597. Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
  2598. may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
  2599. risk of various artefacts.
  2600. If the overlapping value doesn't allow to process the whole input width or
  2601. height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.
  2602. Default value is @var{blocksize}-1, which is the best possible setting.
  2603. @item expr, e
  2604. Set the coefficient factor expression.
  2605. For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
  2606. multiplier value for the coefficient.
  2607. If this is option is set, the @option{sigma} option will be ignored.
  2608. The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the @var{c}
  2609. variable.
  2610. @item n
  2611. Set the @var{blocksize} using the number of bits. @code{1<<@var{n}} defines the
  2612. @var{blocksize}, which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
  2613. The default value is @var{3} (8x8) and can be raised to @var{4} for a
  2614. @var{blocksize} of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
  2615. on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
  2616. better de-noising.
  2617. @end table
  2618. @subsection Examples
  2619. Apply a denoise with a @option{sigma} of @code{4.5}:
  2620. @example
  2621. dctdnoiz=4.5
  2622. @end example
  2623. The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
  2624. @example
  2625. dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
  2626. @end example
  2627. Violent denoise using a block size of @code{16x16}:
  2628. @example
  2629. dctdnoiz=15:n=4
  2630. @end example
  2631. @anchor{decimate}
  2632. @section decimate
  2633. Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
  2634. The filter accepts the following options:
  2635. @table @option
  2636. @item cycle
  2637. Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
  2638. @var{N} means one frame in every batch of @var{N} frames will be dropped.
  2639. Default is @code{5}.
  2640. @item dupthresh
  2641. Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
  2642. is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
  2643. is @code{1.1}
  2644. @item scthresh
  2645. Set scene change threshold. Default is @code{15}.
  2646. @item blockx
  2647. @item blocky
  2648. Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
  2649. Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
  2650. small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is @code{32}.
  2651. @item ppsrc
  2652. Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
  2653. stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
  2654. the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
  2655. @code{1}, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
  2656. stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
  2657. @code{0}.
  2658. @item chroma
  2659. Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
  2660. @code{1}.
  2661. @end table
  2662. @section dejudder
  2663. Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
  2664. Judder can be introduced, for instance, by @ref{pullup} filter. If the original
  2665. source was partially telecined content then the output of @code{pullup,dejudder}
  2666. will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
  2667. container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
  2668. rate video.
  2669. The option available in this filter is:
  2670. @table @option
  2671. @item cycle
  2672. Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
  2673. Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
  2674. @table @samp
  2675. @item 4
  2676. If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
  2677. @item 5
  2678. If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
  2679. @item 20
  2680. If a mixture of the two.
  2681. @end table
  2682. The default is @samp{4}.
  2683. @end table
  2684. @section delogo
  2685. Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
  2686. pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
  2687. (and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
  2688. It accepts the following parameters:
  2689. @table @option
  2690. @item x
  2691. @item y
  2692. Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
  2693. specified.
  2694. @item w
  2695. @item h
  2696. Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
  2697. specified.
  2698. @item band, t
  2699. Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
  2700. @var{w} and @var{h}). The default value is 4.
  2701. @item show
  2702. When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
  2703. finding the right @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, and @var{h} parameters.
  2704. The default value is 0.
  2705. The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
  2706. replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
  2707. immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
  2708. compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
  2709. @end table
  2710. @subsection Examples
  2711. @itemize
  2712. @item
  2713. Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
  2714. and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
  2715. @example
  2716. delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
  2717. @end example
  2718. @end itemize
  2719. @section deshake
  2720. Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
  2721. filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
  2722. tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
  2723. The filter accepts the following options:
  2724. @table @option
  2725. @item x
  2726. @item y
  2727. @item w
  2728. @item h
  2729. Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
  2730. vectors.
  2731. If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
  2732. rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
  2733. and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
  2734. filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
  2735. box.
  2736. This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
  2737. might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
  2738. If any or all of @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} are set to -1
  2739. then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
  2740. without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
  2741. Default - search the whole frame.
  2742. @item rx
  2743. @item ry
  2744. Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
  2745. range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
  2746. @item edge
  2747. Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
  2748. frame. Available values are:
  2749. @table @samp
  2750. @item blank, 0
  2751. Fill zeroes at blank locations
  2752. @item original, 1
  2753. Original image at blank locations
  2754. @item clamp, 2
  2755. Extruded edge value at blank locations
  2756. @item mirror, 3
  2757. Mirrored edge at blank locations
  2758. @end table
  2759. Default value is @samp{mirror}.
  2760. @item blocksize
  2761. Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
  2762. default 8.
  2763. @item contrast
  2764. Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
  2765. the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
  2766. pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
  2767. @item search
  2768. Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
  2769. @table @samp
  2770. @item exhaustive, 0
  2771. Set exhaustive search
  2772. @item less, 1
  2773. Set less exhaustive search.
  2774. @end table
  2775. Default value is @samp{exhaustive}.
  2776. @item filename
  2777. If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
  2778. specified file.
  2779. @item opencl
  2780. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  2781. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  2782. @end table
  2783. @section drawbox
  2784. Draw a colored box on the input image.
  2785. It accepts the following parameters:
  2786. @table @option
  2787. @item x
  2788. @item y
  2789. The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
  2790. @item width, w
  2791. @item height, h
  2792. The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
  2793. the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
  2794. @item color, c
  2795. Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
  2796. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2797. value @code{invert} is used, the box edge color is the same as the
  2798. video with inverted luma.
  2799. @item thickness, t
  2800. The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is @code{3}.
  2801. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2802. @end table
  2803. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2804. following constants:
  2805. @table @option
  2806. @item dar
  2807. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2808. @item hsub
  2809. @item vsub
  2810. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2811. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2812. @item in_h, ih
  2813. @item in_w, iw
  2814. The input width and height.
  2815. @item sar
  2816. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2817. @item x
  2818. @item y
  2819. The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
  2820. @item w
  2821. @item h
  2822. The width and height of the drawn box.
  2823. @item t
  2824. The thickness of the drawn box.
  2825. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2826. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2827. @end table
  2828. @subsection Examples
  2829. @itemize
  2830. @item
  2831. Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
  2832. @example
  2833. drawbox
  2834. @end example
  2835. @item
  2836. Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2837. @example
  2838. drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@@0.5
  2839. @end example
  2840. The previous example can be specified as:
  2841. @example
  2842. drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@@0.5
  2843. @end example
  2844. @item
  2845. Fill the box with pink color:
  2846. @example
  2847. drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@@0.5:t=max
  2848. @end example
  2849. @item
  2850. Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
  2851. @example
  2852. drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red
  2853. @end example
  2854. @end itemize
  2855. @section drawgrid
  2856. Draw a grid on the input image.
  2857. It accepts the following parameters:
  2858. @table @option
  2859. @item x
  2860. @item y
  2861. The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
  2862. @item width, w
  2863. @item height, h
  2864. The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
  2865. input width and height, respectively, minus @code{thickness}, so image gets
  2866. framed. Default to 0.
  2867. @item color, c
  2868. Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
  2869. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2870. value @code{invert} is used, the grid color is the same as the
  2871. video with inverted luma.
  2872. @item thickness, t
  2873. The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is @code{1}.
  2874. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2875. @end table
  2876. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2877. following constants:
  2878. @table @option
  2879. @item dar
  2880. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2881. @item hsub
  2882. @item vsub
  2883. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2884. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2885. @item in_h, ih
  2886. @item in_w, iw
  2887. The input grid cell width and height.
  2888. @item sar
  2889. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2890. @item x
  2891. @item y
  2892. The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
  2893. @item w
  2894. @item h
  2895. The width and height of the drawn cell.
  2896. @item t
  2897. The thickness of the drawn cell.
  2898. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2899. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2900. @end table
  2901. @subsection Examples
  2902. @itemize
  2903. @item
  2904. Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2905. @example
  2906. drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@@0.5
  2907. @end example
  2908. @item
  2909. Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
  2910. @example
  2911. drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@@0.5
  2912. @end example
  2913. @end itemize
  2914. @anchor{drawtext}
  2915. @section drawtext
  2916. Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
  2917. libfreetype library.
  2918. To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2919. @code{--enable-libfreetype}.
  2920. To enable default font fallback and the @var{font} option you need to
  2921. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libfontconfig}.
  2922. To enable the @var{text_shaping} option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2923. @code{--enable-libfribidi}.
  2924. @subsection Syntax
  2925. It accepts the following parameters:
  2926. @table @option
  2927. @item box
  2928. Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
  2929. The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
  2930. The default value of @var{box} is 0.
  2931. @item boxcolor
  2932. The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
  2933. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2934. The default value of @var{boxcolor} is "white".
  2935. @item borderw
  2936. Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using @var{bordercolor}.
  2937. The default value of @var{borderw} is 0.
  2938. @item bordercolor
  2939. Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
  2940. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2941. The default value of @var{bordercolor} is "black".
  2942. @item expansion
  2943. Select how the @var{text} is expanded. Can be either @code{none},
  2944. @code{strftime} (deprecated) or
  2945. @code{normal} (default). See the @ref{drawtext_expansion, Text expansion} section
  2946. below for details.
  2947. @item fix_bounds
  2948. If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
  2949. @item fontcolor
  2950. The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
  2951. the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2952. The default value of @var{fontcolor} is "black".
  2953. @item fontcolor_expr
  2954. String which is expanded the same way as @var{text} to obtain dynamic
  2955. @var{fontcolor} value. By default this option has empty value and is not
  2956. processed. When this option is set, it overrides @var{fontcolor} option.
  2957. @item font
  2958. The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
  2959. @item fontfile
  2960. The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
  2961. This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
  2962. @item fontsize
  2963. The font size to be used for drawing text.
  2964. The default value of @var{fontsize} is 16.
  2965. @item text_shaping
  2966. If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
  2967. right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
  2968. Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
  2969. By default 1 (if supported).
  2970. @item ft_load_flags
  2971. The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
  2972. The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
  2973. a combination of the following values:
  2974. @table @var
  2975. @item default
  2976. @item no_scale
  2977. @item no_hinting
  2978. @item render
  2979. @item no_bitmap
  2980. @item vertical_layout
  2981. @item force_autohint
  2982. @item crop_bitmap
  2983. @item pedantic
  2984. @item ignore_global_advance_width
  2985. @item no_recurse
  2986. @item ignore_transform
  2987. @item monochrome
  2988. @item linear_design
  2989. @item no_autohint
  2990. @end table
  2991. Default value is "default".
  2992. For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
  2993. libfreetype flags.
  2994. @item shadowcolor
  2995. The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
  2996. syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2997. The default value of @var{shadowcolor} is "black".
  2998. @item shadowx
  2999. @item shadowy
  3000. The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
  3001. position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
  3002. values. The default value for both is "0".
  3003. @item start_number
  3004. The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
  3005. is "0".
  3006. @item tabsize
  3007. The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
  3008. Default value is 4.
  3009. @item timecode
  3010. Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
  3011. format. It can be used with or without text parameter. @var{timecode_rate}
  3012. option must be specified.
  3013. @item timecode_rate, rate, r
  3014. Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
  3015. @item text
  3016. The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
  3017. encoded characters.
  3018. This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
  3019. @var{textfile}.
  3020. @item textfile
  3021. A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
  3022. of UTF-8 encoded characters.
  3023. This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
  3024. parameter @var{text}.
  3025. If both @var{text} and @var{textfile} are specified, an error is thrown.
  3026. @item reload
  3027. If set to 1, the @var{textfile} will be reloaded before each frame.
  3028. Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
  3029. @item x
  3030. @item y
  3031. The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
  3032. within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
  3033. output image.
  3034. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is "0".
  3035. See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
  3036. @end table
  3037. The parameters for @var{x} and @var{y} are expressions containing the
  3038. following constants and functions:
  3039. @table @option
  3040. @item dar
  3041. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}
  3042. @item hsub
  3043. @item vsub
  3044. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  3045. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  3046. @item line_h, lh
  3047. the height of each text line
  3048. @item main_h, h, H
  3049. the input height
  3050. @item main_w, w, W
  3051. the input width
  3052. @item max_glyph_a, ascent
  3053. the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
  3054. coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
  3055. glyphs.
  3056. It is a positive value, due to the grid's orientation with the Y axis
  3057. upwards.
  3058. @item max_glyph_d, descent
  3059. the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
  3060. used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
  3061. This is a negative value, due to the grid's orientation, with the Y axis
  3062. upwards.
  3063. @item max_glyph_h
  3064. maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
  3065. contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to @var{ascent} -
  3066. @var{descent}.
  3067. @item max_glyph_w
  3068. maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
  3069. contained in the rendered text
  3070. @item n
  3071. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  3072. @item rand(min, max)
  3073. return a random number included between @var{min} and @var{max}
  3074. @item sar
  3075. The input sample aspect ratio.
  3076. @item t
  3077. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  3078. @item text_h, th
  3079. the height of the rendered text
  3080. @item text_w, tw
  3081. the width of the rendered text
  3082. @item x
  3083. @item y
  3084. the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
  3085. These parameters allow the @var{x} and @var{y} expressions to refer
  3086. each other, so you can for example specify @code{y=x/dar}.
  3087. @end table
  3088. @anchor{drawtext_expansion}
  3089. @subsection Text expansion
  3090. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{strftime},
  3091. the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
  3092. expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
  3093. feature is deprecated.
  3094. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{none}, the text is printed verbatim.
  3095. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{normal} (which is the default),
  3096. the following expansion mechanism is used.
  3097. The backslash character '\', followed by any character, always expands to
  3098. the second character.
  3099. Sequence of the form @code{%@{...@}} are expanded. The text between the
  3100. braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
  3101. If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '@}'),
  3102. they should be escaped.
  3103. Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
  3104. @option{text} option in the filter argument string and as the filter
  3105. argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
  3106. that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
  3107. problems.
  3108. The following functions are available:
  3109. @table @command
  3110. @item expr, e
  3111. The expression evaluation result.
  3112. It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
  3113. which accepts the same constants and functions as the @var{x} and
  3114. @var{y} values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
  3115. example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
  3116. the constants @var{text_w} and @var{text_h} will have an undefined
  3117. value.
  3118. @item expr_int_format, eif
  3119. Evaluate the expression's value and output as formatted integer.
  3120. The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the @var{expr} function.
  3121. The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are 'x', 'X', 'd' and
  3122. 'u'. They are treated exactly as in the printf function.
  3123. The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
  3124. It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
  3125. @item gmtime
  3126. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
  3127. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3128. @item localtime
  3129. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
  3130. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  3131. @item metadata
  3132. Frame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
  3133. @item n, frame_num
  3134. The frame number, starting from 0.
  3135. @item pict_type
  3136. A 1 character description of the current picture type.
  3137. @item pts
  3138. The timestamp of the current frame.
  3139. It can take up to two arguments.
  3140. The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to @code{flt}
  3141. for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; @code{hms} stands
  3142. for a formatted @var{[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm} timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
  3143. The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
  3144. @end table
  3145. @subsection Examples
  3146. @itemize
  3147. @item
  3148. Draw "Test Text" with font FreeSerif, using the default values for the
  3149. optional parameters.
  3150. @example
  3151. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"
  3152. @end example
  3153. @item
  3154. Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100
  3155. and y=50 (counting from the top-left corner of the screen), text is
  3156. yellow with a red box around it. Both the text and the box have an
  3157. opacity of 20%.
  3158. @example
  3159. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
  3160. x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=yellow@@0.2: box=1: boxcolor=red@@0.2"
  3161. @end example
  3162. Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used
  3163. within the parameter list.
  3164. @item
  3165. Show the text at the center of the video frame:
  3166. @example
  3167. drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h-line_h)/2"
  3168. @end example
  3169. @item
  3170. Show a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video
  3171. frame. The file @file{LONG_LINE} is assumed to contain a single line
  3172. with no newlines.
  3173. @example
  3174. drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"
  3175. @end example
  3176. @item
  3177. Show the content of file @file{CREDITS} off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.
  3178. @example
  3179. drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"
  3180. @end example
  3181. @item
  3182. Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.
  3183. The glyph baseline is placed at half screen height.
  3184. @example
  3185. drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"
  3186. @end example
  3187. @item
  3188. Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:
  3189. @example
  3190. drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"
  3191. @end example
  3192. @item
  3193. Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.
  3194. @example
  3195. drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'
  3196. @end example
  3197. @item
  3198. Print the date of a real-time encoding (see strftime(3)):
  3199. @example
  3200. drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%@{localtime\:%a %b %d %Y@}'
  3201. @end example
  3202. @item
  3203. Show text fading in and out (appearing/disappearing):
  3204. @example
  3205. #!/bin/sh
  3206. DS=1.0 # display start
  3207. DE=10.0 # display end
  3208. FID=1.5 # fade in duration
  3209. FOD=5 # fade out duration
  3210. ffplay -f lavfi "color,drawtext=text=TEST:fontsize=50:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor_expr=ff0000%@{eif\\\\: clip(255*(1*between(t\\, $DS + $FID\\, $DE - $FOD) + ((t - $DS)/$FID)*between(t\\, $DS\\, $DS + $FID) + (-(t - $DE)/$FOD)*between(t\\, $DE - $FOD\\, $DE) )\\, 0\\, 255) \\\\: x\\\\: 2 @}"
  3211. @end example
  3212. @end itemize
  3213. For more information about libfreetype, check:
  3214. @url{http://www.freetype.org/}.
  3215. For more information about fontconfig, check:
  3216. @url{http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html}.
  3217. For more information about libfribidi, check:
  3218. @url{http://fribidi.org/}.
  3219. @section edgedetect
  3220. Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
  3221. The filter accepts the following options:
  3222. @table @option
  3223. @item low
  3224. @item high
  3225. Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
  3226. algorithm.
  3227. The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
  3228. connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
  3229. by the low threshold.
  3230. @var{low} and @var{high} threshold values must be chosen in the range
  3231. [0,1], and @var{low} should be lesser or equal to @var{high}.
  3232. Default value for @var{low} is @code{20/255}, and default value for @var{high}
  3233. is @code{50/255}.
  3234. @item mode
  3235. Define the drawing mode.
  3236. @table @samp
  3237. @item wires
  3238. Draw white/gray wires on black background.
  3239. @item colormix
  3240. Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
  3241. @end table
  3242. Default value is @var{wires}.
  3243. @end table
  3244. @subsection Examples
  3245. @itemize
  3246. @item
  3247. Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
  3248. @example
  3249. edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
  3250. @end example
  3251. @item
  3252. Painting effect without thresholding:
  3253. @example
  3254. edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
  3255. @end example
  3256. @end itemize
  3257. @section extractplanes
  3258. Extract color channel components from input video stream into
  3259. separate grayscale video streams.
  3260. The filter accepts the following option:
  3261. @table @option
  3262. @item planes
  3263. Set plane(s) to extract.
  3264. Available values for planes are:
  3265. @table @samp
  3266. @item y
  3267. @item u
  3268. @item v
  3269. @item a
  3270. @item r
  3271. @item g
  3272. @item b
  3273. @end table
  3274. Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
  3275. That means you cannot select @code{r}, @code{g}, @code{b} planes
  3276. with @code{y}, @code{u}, @code{v} planes at same time.
  3277. @end table
  3278. @subsection Examples
  3279. @itemize
  3280. @item
  3281. Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
  3282. into 3 grayscale outputs:
  3283. @example
  3284. ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
  3285. @end example
  3286. @end itemize
  3287. @section elbg
  3288. Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
  3289. For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
  3290. the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
  3291. of distinct output colors.
  3292. This filter accepts the following options.
  3293. @table @option
  3294. @item codebook_length, l
  3295. Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
  3296. represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
  3297. @item nb_steps, n
  3298. Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
  3299. mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
  3300. computation time. Default value is 1.
  3301. @item seed, s
  3302. Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
  3303. UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
  3304. will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
  3305. @end table
  3306. @section fade
  3307. Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
  3308. It accepts the following parameters:
  3309. @table @option
  3310. @item type, t
  3311. The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
  3312. effect.
  3313. Default is @code{in}.
  3314. @item start_frame, s
  3315. Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
  3316. effect at. Default is 0.
  3317. @item nb_frames, n
  3318. The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
  3319. fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
  3320. At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
  3321. selected @option{color}.
  3322. Default is 25.
  3323. @item alpha
  3324. If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
  3325. Default value is 0.
  3326. @item start_time, st
  3327. Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
  3328. effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
  3329. whichever comes last. Default is 0.
  3330. @item duration, d
  3331. The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
  3332. fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
  3333. at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
  3334. selected @option{color}.
  3335. If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
  3336. @item color, c
  3337. Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
  3338. @end table
  3339. @subsection Examples
  3340. @itemize
  3341. @item
  3342. Fade in the first 30 frames of video:
  3343. @example
  3344. fade=in:0:30
  3345. @end example
  3346. The command above is equivalent to:
  3347. @example
  3348. fade=t=in:s=0:n=30
  3349. @end example
  3350. @item
  3351. Fade out the last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:
  3352. @example
  3353. fade=out:155:45
  3354. fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45
  3355. @end example
  3356. @item
  3357. Fade in the first 25 frames and fade out the last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:
  3358. @example
  3359. fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25
  3360. @end example
  3361. @item
  3362. Make the first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:
  3363. @example
  3364. fade=in:5:20:color=yellow
  3365. @end example
  3366. @item
  3367. Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:
  3368. @example
  3369. fade=in:0:25:alpha=1
  3370. @end example
  3371. @item
  3372. Make the first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:
  3373. @example
  3374. fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5
  3375. @end example
  3376. @end itemize
  3377. @section field
  3378. Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
  3379. arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
  3380. non-interlaced.
  3381. The filter accepts the following options:
  3382. @table @option
  3383. @item type
  3384. Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is @code{0} or
  3385. @code{top}) or the bottom field (if the value is @code{1} or
  3386. @code{bottom}).
  3387. @end table
  3388. @section fieldmatch
  3389. Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
  3390. progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
  3391. frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine @code{fieldmatch} needs to be
  3392. followed by a decimation filter such as @ref{decimate} in the filtergraph.
  3393. The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
  3394. the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
  3395. If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
  3396. @code{fieldmatch} will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
  3397. But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
  3398. de-interlaced by a later filter such as @ref{yadif} before decimation.
  3399. In addition to the various configuration options, @code{fieldmatch} can take an
  3400. optional second stream, activated through the @option{ppsrc} option. If
  3401. enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
  3402. this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
  3403. help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
  3404. (assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
  3405. or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
  3406. Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
  3407. and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
  3408. which @code{fieldmatch} is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
  3409. close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
  3410. The @ref{decimate} filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
  3411. Do not use @code{fieldmatch} and @ref{decimate} if your input has mixed
  3412. telecined and progressive content with changing framerate.
  3413. The filter accepts the following options:
  3414. @table @option
  3415. @item order
  3416. Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
  3417. @table @samp
  3418. @item auto
  3419. Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).
  3420. @item bff
  3421. Assume bottom field first.
  3422. @item tff
  3423. Assume top field first.
  3424. @end table
  3425. Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
  3426. stream.
  3427. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3428. @item mode
  3429. Set the matching mode or strategy to use. @option{pc} mode is the safest in the
  3430. sense that it won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
  3431. possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
  3432. outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
  3433. hand, @option{pcn_ub} mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
  3434. but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
  3435. all somewhere in between @option{pc} and @option{pcn_ub} in terms of risking
  3436. jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
  3437. with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
  3438. More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in @ref{p/c/n/u/b meaning} section.
  3439. Available values are:
  3440. @table @samp
  3441. @item pc
  3442. 2-way matching (p/c)
  3443. @item pc_n
  3444. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
  3445. @item pc_u
  3446. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
  3447. @item pc_n_ub
  3448. 2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
  3449. still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
  3450. @item pcn
  3451. 3-way matching (p/c/n)
  3452. @item pcn_ub
  3453. 3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
  3454. detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
  3455. @end table
  3456. The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
  3457. mode assuming @option{order}=@var{tff} (and @option{field} on @var{auto} or
  3458. @var{top}).
  3459. In terms of speed @option{pc} mode is by far the fastest and @option{pcn_ub} is
  3460. the slowest.
  3461. Default value is @var{pc_n}.
  3462. @item ppsrc
  3463. Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
  3464. input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
  3465. introduction for more details. It is similar to the @option{clip2} feature from
  3466. VFM/TFM.
  3467. Default value is @code{0} (disabled).
  3468. @item field
  3469. Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
  3470. @option{order} unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
  3471. certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
  3472. large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
  3473. @table @samp
  3474. @item auto
  3475. Automatic (same value as @option{order}).
  3476. @item bottom
  3477. Match from the bottom field.
  3478. @item top
  3479. Match from the top field.
  3480. @end table
  3481. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3482. @item mchroma
  3483. Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
  3484. cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to @code{0}
  3485. only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
  3486. artifacts. Setting this to @code{0} could also be used to speed things up at
  3487. the cost of some accuracy.
  3488. Default value is @code{1}.
  3489. @item y0
  3490. @item y1
  3491. These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between @option{y0} and
  3492. @option{y1} from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
  3493. band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
  3494. interfere with the matching. @option{y0} sets the starting scan line and
  3495. @option{y1} sets the ending line; all lines in between @option{y0} and
  3496. @option{y1} (including @option{y0} and @option{y1}) will be ignored. Setting
  3497. @option{y0} and @option{y1} to the same value will disable the feature.
  3498. @option{y0} and @option{y1} defaults to @code{0}.
  3499. @item scthresh
  3500. Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
  3501. the luma plane. Good values are in the @code{[8.0, 14.0]} range. Scene change
  3502. detection is only relevant in case @option{combmatch}=@var{sc}. The range for
  3503. @option{scthresh} is @code{[0.0, 100.0]}.
  3504. Default value is @code{12.0}.
  3505. @item combmatch
  3506. When @option{combatch} is not @var{none}, @code{fieldmatch} will take into
  3507. account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
  3508. final match. Available values are:
  3509. @table @samp
  3510. @item none
  3511. No final matching based on combed scores.
  3512. @item sc
  3513. Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
  3514. @item full
  3515. Use combed scores all the time.
  3516. @end table
  3517. Default is @var{sc}.
  3518. @item combdbg
  3519. Force @code{fieldmatch} to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
  3520. print them. This setting is known as @option{micout} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3521. Available values are:
  3522. @table @samp
  3523. @item none
  3524. No forced calculation.
  3525. @item pcn
  3526. Force p/c/n calculations.
  3527. @item pcnub
  3528. Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
  3529. @end table
  3530. Default value is @var{none}.
  3531. @item cthresh
  3532. This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
  3533. essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
  3534. Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
  3535. can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
  3536. @code{-1} (every pixel will be detected as combed) to @code{255} (no pixel will
  3537. be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
  3538. range is @code{[8, 12]}.
  3539. Default value is @code{9}.
  3540. @item chroma
  3541. Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
  3542. disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
  3543. causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
  3544. using @option{chroma}=@var{0} is usually more reliable, except for the case
  3545. where there is chroma only combing in the source.
  3546. Default value is @code{0}.
  3547. @item blockx
  3548. @item blocky
  3549. Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
  3550. frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
  3551. @option{combpel} pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
  3552. declared combed. See the @option{combpel} parameter description for more info.
  3553. Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
  3554. to 512.
  3555. Default value is @code{16}.
  3556. @item combpel
  3557. The number of combed pixels inside any of the @option{blocky} by
  3558. @option{blockx} size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
  3559. combed. While @option{cthresh} controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
  3560. setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
  3561. window defined by the @option{blockx} and @option{blocky} settings) on the
  3562. frame. Minimum value is @code{0} and maximum is @code{blocky x blockx} (at
  3563. which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
  3564. as @option{MI} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3565. Default value is @code{80}.
  3566. @end table
  3567. @anchor{p/c/n/u/b meaning}
  3568. @subsection p/c/n/u/b meaning
  3569. @subsubsection p/c/n
  3570. We assume the following telecined stream:
  3571. @example
  3572. Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
  3573. Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
  3574. @end example
  3575. The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
  3576. first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
  3577. When @code{fieldmatch} is configured to run a matching from bottom
  3578. (@option{field}=@var{bottom}) this is how this input stream get transformed:
  3579. @example
  3580. Input stream:
  3581. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3582. B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
  3583. Matches: c c n n c
  3584. Output stream:
  3585. T 1 2 3 4 4
  3586. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3587. @end example
  3588. As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
  3589. To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
  3590. after this operation. See for instance the @ref{decimate} filter.
  3591. The same operation now matching from top fields (@option{field}=@var{top})
  3592. looks like this:
  3593. @example
  3594. Input stream:
  3595. T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
  3596. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3597. Matches: c c p p c
  3598. Output stream:
  3599. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3600. B 1 2 2 3 4
  3601. @end example
  3602. In these examples, we can see what @var{p}, @var{c} and @var{n} mean;
  3603. basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
  3604. @itemize
  3605. @item @var{p} matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
  3606. @item @var{c} matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
  3607. @item @var{n} matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
  3608. @end itemize
  3609. @subsubsection u/b
  3610. The @var{u} and @var{b} matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
  3611. from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
  3612. currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
  3613. 'x' is placed above and below each matched fields.
  3614. With bottom matching (@option{field}=@var{bottom}):
  3615. @example
  3616. Match: c p n b u
  3617. x x x x x
  3618. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3619. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3620. x x x x x
  3621. Output frames:
  3622. 2 1 2 2 2
  3623. 2 2 2 1 3
  3624. @end example
  3625. With top matching (@option{field}=@var{top}):
  3626. @example
  3627. Match: c p n b u
  3628. x x x x x
  3629. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3630. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3631. x x x x x
  3632. Output frames:
  3633. 2 2 2 1 2
  3634. 2 1 3 2 2
  3635. @end example
  3636. @subsection Examples
  3637. Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
  3638. @example
  3639. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
  3640. @end example
  3641. Advanced IVTC, with fallback on @ref{yadif} for still combed frames:
  3642. @example
  3643. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
  3644. @end example
  3645. @section fieldorder
  3646. Transform the field order of the input video.
  3647. It accepts the following parameters:
  3648. @table @option
  3649. @item order
  3650. The output field order. Valid values are @var{tff} for top field first or @var{bff}
  3651. for bottom field first.
  3652. @end table
  3653. The default value is @samp{tff}.
  3654. The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
  3655. by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
  3656. This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
  3657. If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
  3658. flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
  3659. not alter the incoming video.
  3660. It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
  3661. which is bottom field first.
  3662. For example:
  3663. @example
  3664. ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
  3665. @end example
  3666. @section fifo
  3667. Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
  3668. It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
  3669. framework.
  3670. It does not take parameters.
  3671. @anchor{format}
  3672. @section format
  3673. Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
  3674. Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
  3675. the next filter.
  3676. It accepts the following parameters:
  3677. @table @option
  3678. @item pix_fmts
  3679. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  3680. "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  3681. @end table
  3682. @subsection Examples
  3683. @itemize
  3684. @item
  3685. Convert the input video to the @var{yuv420p} format
  3686. @example
  3687. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p
  3688. @end example
  3689. Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list
  3690. @example
  3691. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  3692. @end example
  3693. @end itemize
  3694. @anchor{fps}
  3695. @section fps
  3696. Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
  3697. frames as necessary.
  3698. It accepts the following parameters:
  3699. @table @option
  3700. @item fps
  3701. The desired output frame rate. The default is @code{25}.
  3702. @item round
  3703. Rounding method.
  3704. Possible values are:
  3705. @table @option
  3706. @item zero
  3707. zero round towards 0
  3708. @item inf
  3709. round away from 0
  3710. @item down
  3711. round towards -infinity
  3712. @item up
  3713. round towards +infinity
  3714. @item near
  3715. round to nearest
  3716. @end table
  3717. The default is @code{near}.
  3718. @item start_time
  3719. Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
  3720. padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
  3721. about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
  3722. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
  3723. the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
  3724. frames with a negative PTS.
  3725. @end table
  3726. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3727. @var{fps}[:@var{round}].
  3728. See also the @ref{setpts} filter.
  3729. @subsection Examples
  3730. @itemize
  3731. @item
  3732. A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
  3733. @example
  3734. fps=fps=25
  3735. @end example
  3736. @item
  3737. Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
  3738. @example
  3739. fps=fps=film:round=near
  3740. @end example
  3741. @end itemize
  3742. @section framepack
  3743. Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
  3744. metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
  3745. framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
  3746. that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the @ref{scale} and
  3747. @ref{fps} filters.
  3748. It accepts the following parameters:
  3749. @table @option
  3750. @item format
  3751. The desired packing format. Supported values are:
  3752. @table @option
  3753. @item sbs
  3754. The views are next to each other (default).
  3755. @item tab
  3756. The views are on top of each other.
  3757. @item lines
  3758. The views are packed by line.
  3759. @item columns
  3760. The views are packed by column.
  3761. @item frameseq
  3762. The views are temporally interleaved.
  3763. @end table
  3764. @end table
  3765. Some examples:
  3766. @example
  3767. # Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
  3768. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
  3769. # Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
  3770. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
  3771. @end example
  3772. @section framestep
  3773. Select one frame every N-th frame.
  3774. This filter accepts the following option:
  3775. @table @option
  3776. @item step
  3777. Select frame after every @code{step} frames.
  3778. Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is @code{1}.
  3779. @end table
  3780. @anchor{frei0r}
  3781. @section frei0r
  3782. Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
  3783. To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
  3784. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  3785. It accepts the following parameters:
  3786. @table @option
  3787. @item filter_name
  3788. The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
  3789. @env{FREI0R_PATH} is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
  3790. directories specified by the colon-separated list in @env{FREIOR_PATH}.
  3791. Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
  3792. @file{HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/},
  3793. @file{/usr/lib/frei0r-1/}.
  3794. @item filter_params
  3795. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
  3796. @end table
  3797. A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
  3798. "y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
  3799. @var{R}/@var{G}/@var{B}, where @var{R}, @var{G}, and @var{B} are floating point
  3800. numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
  3801. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as @var{X}/@var{Y}, where
  3802. @var{X} and @var{Y} are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
  3803. The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
  3804. effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
  3805. @subsection Examples
  3806. @itemize
  3807. @item
  3808. Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
  3809. @example
  3810. frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
  3811. @end example
  3812. @item
  3813. Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
  3814. @example
  3815. frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
  3816. frei0r=colordistance:violet
  3817. frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
  3818. @end example
  3819. @item
  3820. Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
  3821. positions:
  3822. @example
  3823. frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
  3824. @end example
  3825. @end itemize
  3826. For more information, see
  3827. @url{http://frei0r.dyne.org}
  3828. @section geq
  3829. The filter accepts the following options:
  3830. @table @option
  3831. @item lum_expr, lum
  3832. Set the luminance expression.
  3833. @item cb_expr, cb
  3834. Set the chrominance blue expression.
  3835. @item cr_expr, cr
  3836. Set the chrominance red expression.
  3837. @item alpha_expr, a
  3838. Set the alpha expression.
  3839. @item red_expr, r
  3840. Set the red expression.
  3841. @item green_expr, g
  3842. Set the green expression.
  3843. @item blue_expr, b
  3844. Set the blue expression.
  3845. @end table
  3846. The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
  3847. of the @option{lum_expr}, @option{cb_expr}, or @option{cr_expr}
  3848. options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
  3849. colorspace. If one of the @option{red_expr}, @option{green_expr}, or
  3850. @option{blue_expr} options is specified, it will select an RGB
  3851. colorspace.
  3852. If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
  3853. one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
  3854. If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
  3855. to the luminance expression.
  3856. The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
  3857. @table @option
  3858. @item N
  3859. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  3860. @item X
  3861. @item Y
  3862. The coordinates of the current sample.
  3863. @item W
  3864. @item H
  3865. The width and height of the image.
  3866. @item SW
  3867. @item SH
  3868. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  3869. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  3870. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  3871. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  3872. @item T
  3873. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  3874. @item p(x, y)
  3875. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the current
  3876. plane.
  3877. @item lum(x, y)
  3878. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the luminance
  3879. plane.
  3880. @item cb(x, y)
  3881. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3882. blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3883. @item cr(x, y)
  3884. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3885. red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3886. @item r(x, y)
  3887. @item g(x, y)
  3888. @item b(x, y)
  3889. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3890. red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
  3891. @item alpha(x, y)
  3892. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the alpha
  3893. plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3894. @end table
  3895. For functions, if @var{x} and @var{y} are outside the area, the value will be
  3896. automatically clipped to the closer edge.
  3897. @subsection Examples
  3898. @itemize
  3899. @item
  3900. Flip the image horizontally:
  3901. @example
  3902. geq=p(W-X\,Y)
  3903. @end example
  3904. @item
  3905. Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle @code{PI/3} and a
  3906. wavelength of 100 pixels:
  3907. @example
  3908. geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
  3909. @end example
  3910. @item
  3911. Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
  3912. @example
  3913. nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
  3914. @end example
  3915. @item
  3916. Generate a quick emboss effect:
  3917. @example
  3918. format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
  3919. @end example
  3920. @item
  3921. Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
  3922. @example
  3923. geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
  3924. @end example
  3925. @item
  3926. Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
  3927. the @ref{vignette} filter):
  3928. @example
  3929. geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
  3930. @end example
  3931. @item
  3932. Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
  3933. compose with @ref{overlay}. In this example the video will gradually
  3934. become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
  3935. by the linear gradient:
  3936. @example
  3937. ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
  3938. @end example
  3939. @end itemize
  3940. @section gradfun
  3941. Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
  3942. regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
  3943. Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
  3944. dither them.
  3945. It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
  3946. lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
  3947. bring back the bands.
  3948. It accepts the following parameters:
  3949. @table @option
  3950. @item strength
  3951. The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
  3952. the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
  3953. .51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
  3954. valid range.
  3955. @item radius
  3956. The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
  3957. gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
  3958. regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
  3959. values will be clipped to the valid range.
  3960. @end table
  3961. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3962. @var{strength}[:@var{radius}]
  3963. @subsection Examples
  3964. @itemize
  3965. @item
  3966. Apply the filter with a @code{3.5} strength and radius of @code{8}:
  3967. @example
  3968. gradfun=3.5:8
  3969. @end example
  3970. @item
  3971. Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
  3972. value):
  3973. @example
  3974. gradfun=radius=8
  3975. @end example
  3976. @end itemize
  3977. @anchor{haldclut}
  3978. @section haldclut
  3979. Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
  3980. First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
  3981. The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
  3982. The filter accepts the following options:
  3983. @table @option
  3984. @item shortest
  3985. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  3986. @item repeatlast
  3987. Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
  3988. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
  3989. Default is @code{1}.
  3990. @end table
  3991. @code{haldclut} also has the same interpolation options as @ref{lut3d} (both
  3992. filters share the same internals).
  3993. More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website
  3994. (Hald CLUT author) at @url{http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html}.
  3995. @subsection Workflow examples
  3996. @subsubsection Hald CLUT video stream
  3997. Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
  3998. @example
  3999. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
  4000. @end example
  4001. Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
  4002. Then use it with @code{haldclut} to apply it on some random stream:
  4003. @example
  4004. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
  4005. @end example
  4006. The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
  4007. @file{clut.nut}), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
  4008. to the remaining frames of the @code{mandelbrot} stream.
  4009. @subsubsection Hald CLUT with preview
  4010. A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of @code{Level*Level*Level} by
  4011. @code{Level*Level*Level} pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
  4012. biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
  4013. padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
  4014. a preview of the Hald CLUT.
  4015. Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
  4016. @code{haldclut} filter:
  4017. @example
  4018. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "
  4019. pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
  4020. smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
  4021. [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
  4022. [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
  4023. @end example
  4024. It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
  4025. bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
  4026. the color changes.
  4027. Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
  4028. @example
  4029. ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
  4030. @end example
  4031. @section hflip
  4032. Flip the input video horizontally.
  4033. For example, to horizontally flip the input video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  4034. @example
  4035. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
  4036. @end example
  4037. @section histeq
  4038. This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
  4039. per-frame basis.
  4040. It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
  4041. intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
  4042. equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
  4043. viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
  4044. useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
  4045. video.
  4046. The filter accepts the following options:
  4047. @table @option
  4048. @item strength
  4049. Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
  4050. is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
  4051. approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
  4052. in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
  4053. @item intensity
  4054. Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
  4055. values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
  4056. the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
  4057. must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
  4058. @item antibanding
  4059. Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
  4060. the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
  4061. the histogram. Possible values are @code{none}, @code{weak} or
  4062. @code{strong}. It defaults to @code{none}.
  4063. @end table
  4064. @section histogram
  4065. Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
  4066. The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
  4067. distribution in an image.
  4068. The filter accepts the following options:
  4069. @table @option
  4070. @item mode
  4071. Set histogram mode.
  4072. It accepts the following values:
  4073. @table @samp
  4074. @item levels
  4075. Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
  4076. image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
  4077. the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
  4078. current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
  4079. @item color
  4080. Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
  4081. graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
  4082. vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
  4083. (i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
  4084. the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
  4085. side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
  4086. with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
  4087. The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
  4088. a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
  4089. (color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
  4090. the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
  4091. square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
  4092. color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
  4093. colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
  4094. the edge of the square.
  4095. @item color2
  4096. Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as @code{color} but actual chroma values
  4097. are displayed.
  4098. @item waveform
  4099. Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
  4100. represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
  4101. In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
  4102. side represents value = 255.
  4103. @end table
  4104. Default value is @code{levels}.
  4105. @item level_height
  4106. Set height of level in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{200}.
  4107. Allowed range is [50, 2048].
  4108. @item scale_height
  4109. Set height of color scale in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{12}.
  4110. Allowed range is [0, 40].
  4111. @item step
  4112. Set step for @code{waveform} mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
  4113. many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
  4114. Default value is @code{10}. Allowed range is [1, 255].
  4115. @item waveform_mode
  4116. Set mode for @code{waveform}. Can be either @code{row}, or @code{column}.
  4117. Default is @code{row}.
  4118. @item waveform_mirror
  4119. Set mirroring mode for @code{waveform}. @code{0} means unmirrored, @code{1}
  4120. means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
  4121. side for @code{row} mode and at the top for @code{column} mode. Default is
  4122. @code{0} (unmirrored).
  4123. @item display_mode
  4124. Set display mode for @code{waveform} and @code{levels}.
  4125. It accepts the following values:
  4126. @table @samp
  4127. @item parade
  4128. Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
  4129. @code{row} waveform mode or one below the other in @code{column} waveform mode
  4130. for @code{waveform} histogram mode. For @code{levels} histogram mode,
  4131. per color component graphs are placed below each other.
  4132. Using this display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easy to
  4133. spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
  4134. contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
  4135. grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
  4136. and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
  4137. roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
  4138. making level adjustments the three waveforms.
  4139. @item overlay
  4140. Presents information identical to that in the @code{parade}, except
  4141. that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
  4142. over one another.
  4143. This display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easier to spot
  4144. relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
  4145. components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
  4146. or blacks.
  4147. @end table
  4148. Default is @code{parade}.
  4149. @item levels_mode
  4150. Set mode for @code{levels}. Can be either @code{linear}, or @code{logarithmic}.
  4151. Default is @code{linear}.
  4152. @end table
  4153. @subsection Examples
  4154. @itemize
  4155. @item
  4156. Calculate and draw histogram:
  4157. @example
  4158. ffplay -i input -vf histogram
  4159. @end example
  4160. @end itemize
  4161. @anchor{hqdn3d}
  4162. @section hqdn3d
  4163. This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
  4164. image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
  4165. still. It should enhance compressibility.
  4166. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4167. @table @option
  4168. @item luma_spatial
  4169. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
  4170. It defaults to 4.0.
  4171. @item chroma_spatial
  4172. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
  4173. It defaults to 3.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4174. @item luma_tmp
  4175. A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4176. 6.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  4177. @item chroma_tmp
  4178. A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
  4179. @var{luma_tmp}*@var{chroma_spatial}/@var{luma_spatial}.
  4180. @end table
  4181. @section hqx
  4182. Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
  4183. was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
  4184. It accepts the following option:
  4185. @table @option
  4186. @item n
  4187. Set the scaling dimension: @code{2} for @code{hq2x}, @code{3} for
  4188. @code{hq3x} and @code{4} for @code{hq4x}.
  4189. Default is @code{3}.
  4190. @end table
  4191. @section hue
  4192. Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
  4193. It accepts the following parameters:
  4194. @table @option
  4195. @item h
  4196. Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
  4197. and defaults to "0".
  4198. @item s
  4199. Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4200. defaults to "1".
  4201. @item H
  4202. Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
  4203. expression, and defaults to "0".
  4204. @item b
  4205. Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4206. defaults to "0".
  4207. @end table
  4208. @option{h} and @option{H} are mutually exclusive, and can't be
  4209. specified at the same time.
  4210. The @option{b}, @option{h}, @option{H} and @option{s} option values are
  4211. expressions containing the following constants:
  4212. @table @option
  4213. @item n
  4214. frame count of the input frame starting from 0
  4215. @item pts
  4216. presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
  4217. @item r
  4218. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  4219. @item t
  4220. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  4221. @item tb
  4222. time base of the input video
  4223. @end table
  4224. @subsection Examples
  4225. @itemize
  4226. @item
  4227. Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:
  4228. @example
  4229. hue=h=90:s=1
  4230. @end example
  4231. @item
  4232. Same command but expressing the hue in radians:
  4233. @example
  4234. hue=H=PI/2:s=1
  4235. @end example
  4236. @item
  4237. Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0
  4238. and 2 over a period of 1 second:
  4239. @example
  4240. hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"
  4241. @end example
  4242. @item
  4243. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:
  4244. @example
  4245. hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"
  4246. @end example
  4247. The general fade-in expression can be written as:
  4248. @example
  4249. hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"
  4250. @end example
  4251. @item
  4252. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:
  4253. @example
  4254. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"
  4255. @end example
  4256. The general fade-out expression can be written as:
  4257. @example
  4258. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"
  4259. @end example
  4260. @end itemize
  4261. @subsection Commands
  4262. This filter supports the following commands:
  4263. @table @option
  4264. @item b
  4265. @item s
  4266. @item h
  4267. @item H
  4268. Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
  4269. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4270. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4271. value.
  4272. @end table
  4273. @section idet
  4274. Detect video interlacing type.
  4275. This filter tries to detect if the input frames as interlaced, progressive,
  4276. top or bottom field first. It will also try and detect fields that are
  4277. repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).
  4278. Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
  4279. Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.
  4280. The filter will log these metadata values:
  4281. @table @option
  4282. @item single.current_frame
  4283. Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
  4284. ``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
  4285. ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''
  4286. @item single.tff
  4287. Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.
  4288. @item multiple.tff
  4289. Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.
  4290. @item single.bff
  4291. Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.
  4292. @item multiple.current_frame
  4293. Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
  4294. ``tff'' (top field first), ``bff'' (bottom field first),
  4295. ``progressive'', or ``undetermined''
  4296. @item multiple.bff
  4297. Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.
  4298. @item single.progressive
  4299. Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.
  4300. @item multiple.progressive
  4301. Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.
  4302. @item single.undetermined
  4303. Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.
  4304. @item multiple.undetermined
  4305. Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.
  4306. @item repeated.current_frame
  4307. Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of ``neither'', ``top'', or ``bottom''.
  4308. @item repeated.neither
  4309. Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.
  4310. @item repeated.top
  4311. Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame's top field.
  4312. @item repeated.bottom
  4313. Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame's bottom field.
  4314. @end table
  4315. The filter accepts the following options:
  4316. @table @option
  4317. @item intl_thres
  4318. Set interlacing threshold.
  4319. @item prog_thres
  4320. Set progressive threshold.
  4321. @item repeat_thres
  4322. Threshold for repeated field detection.
  4323. @item half_life
  4324. Number of frames after which a given frame's contribution to the
  4325. statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to it's
  4326. classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
  4327. full weight of 1.0 forever.
  4328. @end table
  4329. @section il
  4330. Deinterleave or interleave fields.
  4331. This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
  4332. deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
  4333. fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
  4334. half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
  4335. You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
  4336. The filter accepts the following options:
  4337. @table @option
  4338. @item luma_mode, l
  4339. @item chroma_mode, c
  4340. @item alpha_mode, a
  4341. Available values for @var{luma_mode}, @var{chroma_mode} and
  4342. @var{alpha_mode} are:
  4343. @table @samp
  4344. @item none
  4345. Do nothing.
  4346. @item deinterleave, d
  4347. Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
  4348. @item interleave, i
  4349. Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
  4350. @end table
  4351. Default value is @code{none}.
  4352. @item luma_swap, ls
  4353. @item chroma_swap, cs
  4354. @item alpha_swap, as
  4355. Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is @code{0}.
  4356. @end table
  4357. @section interlace
  4358. Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
  4359. lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
  4360. halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
  4361. @example
  4362. Original Original New Frame
  4363. Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
  4364. ========== =========== ==================
  4365. Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
  4366. Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
  4367. Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
  4368. Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
  4369. ... ... ...
  4370. New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
  4371. @end example
  4372. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4373. @table @option
  4374. @item scan
  4375. This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
  4376. (tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
  4377. @item lowpass
  4378. Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
  4379. interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
  4380. @end table
  4381. @section kerndeint
  4382. Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft's adaptive kernel
  4383. deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
  4384. progressive frames.
  4385. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4386. @table @option
  4387. @item thresh
  4388. Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when
  4389. determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
  4390. in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
  4391. applying the process on every pixels.
  4392. @item map
  4393. Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
  4394. Default is 0.
  4395. @item order
  4396. Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
  4397. 0. Default is 0.
  4398. @item sharp
  4399. Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4400. @item twoway
  4401. Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4402. @end table
  4403. @subsection Examples
  4404. @itemize
  4405. @item
  4406. Apply default values:
  4407. @example
  4408. kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
  4409. @end example
  4410. @item
  4411. Enable additional sharpening:
  4412. @example
  4413. kerndeint=sharp=1
  4414. @end example
  4415. @item
  4416. Paint processed pixels in white:
  4417. @example
  4418. kerndeint=map=1
  4419. @end example
  4420. @end itemize
  4421. @section lenscorrection
  4422. Correct radial lens distortion
  4423. This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
  4424. of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
  4425. one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
  4426. To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
  4427. and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
  4428. Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
  4429. Digikam from the KDE project.
  4430. In contrast to the @ref{vignette} filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
  4431. this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas @ref{vignette} corrects the
  4432. brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
  4433. cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
  4434. be applied before or after lens correction.
  4435. @subsection Options
  4436. The filter accepts the following options:
  4437. @table @option
  4438. @item cx
  4439. Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4440. distrortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4441. width.
  4442. @item cy
  4443. Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
  4444. distrortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
  4445. height.
  4446. @item k1
  4447. Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4448. @item k2
  4449. Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
  4450. @end table
  4451. The formula that generates the correction is:
  4452. @var{r_src} = @var{r_tgt} * (1 + @var{k1} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^2 + @var{k2} * (@var{r_tgt} / @var{r_0})^4)
  4453. where @var{r_0} is halve of the image diagonal and @var{r_src} and @var{r_tgt} are the
  4454. distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
  4455. @anchor{lut3d}
  4456. @section lut3d
  4457. Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
  4458. The filter accepts the following options:
  4459. @table @option
  4460. @item file
  4461. Set the 3D LUT file name.
  4462. Currently supported formats:
  4463. @table @samp
  4464. @item 3dl
  4465. AfterEffects
  4466. @item cube
  4467. Iridas
  4468. @item dat
  4469. DaVinci
  4470. @item m3d
  4471. Pandora
  4472. @end table
  4473. @item interp
  4474. Select interpolation mode.
  4475. Available values are:
  4476. @table @samp
  4477. @item nearest
  4478. Use values from the nearest defined point.
  4479. @item trilinear
  4480. Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
  4481. @item tetrahedral
  4482. Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
  4483. @end table
  4484. @end table
  4485. @section lut, lutrgb, lutyuv
  4486. Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
  4487. to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
  4488. @var{lutyuv} applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, @var{lutrgb}
  4489. to an RGB input video.
  4490. These filters accept the following parameters:
  4491. @table @option
  4492. @item c0
  4493. set first pixel component expression
  4494. @item c1
  4495. set second pixel component expression
  4496. @item c2
  4497. set third pixel component expression
  4498. @item c3
  4499. set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
  4500. @item r
  4501. set red component expression
  4502. @item g
  4503. set green component expression
  4504. @item b
  4505. set blue component expression
  4506. @item a
  4507. alpha component expression
  4508. @item y
  4509. set Y/luminance component expression
  4510. @item u
  4511. set U/Cb component expression
  4512. @item v
  4513. set V/Cr component expression
  4514. @end table
  4515. Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
  4516. the corresponding pixel component values.
  4517. The exact component associated to each of the @var{c*} options depends on the
  4518. format in input.
  4519. The @var{lut} filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
  4520. @var{lutrgb} requires RGB pixel formats in input, and @var{lutyuv} requires YUV.
  4521. The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
  4522. @table @option
  4523. @item w
  4524. @item h
  4525. The input width and height.
  4526. @item val
  4527. The input value for the pixel component.
  4528. @item clipval
  4529. The input value, clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4530. @item maxval
  4531. The maximum value for the pixel component.
  4532. @item minval
  4533. The minimum value for the pixel component.
  4534. @item negval
  4535. The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
  4536. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range; it corresponds to the expression
  4537. "maxval-clipval+minval".
  4538. @item clip(val)
  4539. The computed value in @var{val}, clipped to the
  4540. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4541. @item gammaval(gamma)
  4542. The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
  4543. clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range. It corresponds to the
  4544. expression
  4545. "pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,@var{gamma})*(maxval-minval)+minval"
  4546. @end table
  4547. All expressions default to "val".
  4548. @subsection Examples
  4549. @itemize
  4550. @item
  4551. Negate input video:
  4552. @example
  4553. lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
  4554. lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"
  4555. @end example
  4556. The above is the same as:
  4557. @example
  4558. lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
  4559. lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"
  4560. @end example
  4561. @item
  4562. Negate luminance:
  4563. @example
  4564. lutyuv=y=negval
  4565. @end example
  4566. @item
  4567. Remove chroma components, turning the video into a graytone image:
  4568. @example
  4569. lutyuv="u=128:v=128"
  4570. @end example
  4571. @item
  4572. Apply a luma burning effect:
  4573. @example
  4574. lutyuv="y=2*val"
  4575. @end example
  4576. @item
  4577. Remove green and blue components:
  4578. @example
  4579. lutrgb="g=0:b=0"
  4580. @end example
  4581. @item
  4582. Set a constant alpha channel value on input:
  4583. @example
  4584. format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"
  4585. @end example
  4586. @item
  4587. Correct luminance gamma by a factor of 0.5:
  4588. @example
  4589. lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)
  4590. @end example
  4591. @item
  4592. Discard least significant bits of luma:
  4593. @example
  4594. lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'
  4595. @end example
  4596. @end itemize
  4597. @section mergeplanes
  4598. Merge color channel components from several video streams.
  4599. The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
  4600. planes to the output video.
  4601. This filter accepts the following options:
  4602. @table @option
  4603. @item mapping
  4604. Set input to output plane mapping. Default is @code{0}.
  4605. The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
  4606. hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the
  4607. mapping for the first plane of the output stream. 'A' sets the number of
  4608. the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane number of the
  4609. corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
  4610. similar, 'Bb' describes the mapping for the output stream second
  4611. plane, 'Cc' describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
  4612. 'Dd' describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
  4613. @item format
  4614. Set output pixel format. Default is @code{yuva444p}.
  4615. @end table
  4616. @subsection Examples
  4617. @itemize
  4618. @item
  4619. Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
  4620. @example
  4621. [a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
  4622. @end example
  4623. @item
  4624. Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
  4625. @example
  4626. [a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
  4627. @end example
  4628. @item
  4629. Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
  4630. @example
  4631. format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
  4632. @end example
  4633. @item
  4634. Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
  4635. @example
  4636. format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
  4637. @end example
  4638. @item
  4639. Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
  4640. @example
  4641. format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
  4642. @end example
  4643. @end itemize
  4644. @section mcdeint
  4645. Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
  4646. It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
  4647. with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
  4648. This filter accepts the following options:
  4649. @table @option
  4650. @item mode
  4651. Set the deinterlacing mode.
  4652. It accepts one of the following values:
  4653. @table @samp
  4654. @item fast
  4655. @item medium
  4656. @item slow
  4657. use iterative motion estimation
  4658. @item extra_slow
  4659. like @samp{slow}, but use multiple reference frames.
  4660. @end table
  4661. Default value is @samp{fast}.
  4662. @item parity
  4663. Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
  4664. one of the following values:
  4665. @table @samp
  4666. @item 0, tff
  4667. assume top field first
  4668. @item 1, bff
  4669. assume bottom field first
  4670. @end table
  4671. Default value is @samp{bff}.
  4672. @item qp
  4673. Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
  4674. encoder.
  4675. Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
  4676. optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
  4677. @end table
  4678. @section mp
  4679. Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
  4680. This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
  4681. MPlayer/MEncoder.
  4682. This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
  4683. may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
  4684. be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
  4685. depending on them when writing portable scripts.
  4686. The filter accepts the parameters:
  4687. @var{filter_name}[:=]@var{filter_params}
  4688. @var{filter_name} is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
  4689. @var{filter_params} is a string containing the parameters accepted by
  4690. the named filter.
  4691. The list of the currently supported filters follows:
  4692. @table @var
  4693. @item eq2
  4694. @item eq
  4695. @item fspp
  4696. @item ilpack
  4697. @item pp7
  4698. @item softpulldown
  4699. @item uspp
  4700. @end table
  4701. The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
  4702. of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
  4703. the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
  4704. @subsection Examples
  4705. @itemize
  4706. @item
  4707. Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
  4708. @example
  4709. mp=eq2=1.0:2:0.5
  4710. @end example
  4711. @end itemize
  4712. See also mplayer(1), @url{http://www.mplayerhq.hu/}.
  4713. @section mpdecimate
  4714. Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
  4715. order to reduce frame rate.
  4716. The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
  4717. (e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
  4718. fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
  4719. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4720. @table @option
  4721. @item max
  4722. Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
  4723. positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
  4724. negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
  4725. number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
  4726. Default value is 0.
  4727. @item hi
  4728. @item lo
  4729. @item frac
  4730. Set the dropping threshold values.
  4731. Values for @option{hi} and @option{lo} are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
  4732. represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
  4733. corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
  4734. out differently over the block.
  4735. A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
  4736. than a threshold of @option{hi}, and if no more than @option{frac} blocks (1
  4737. meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of @option{lo}.
  4738. Default value for @option{hi} is 64*12, default value for @option{lo} is
  4739. 64*5, and default value for @option{frac} is 0.33.
  4740. @end table
  4741. @section negate
  4742. Negate input video.
  4743. It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
  4744. alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
  4745. @section noformat
  4746. Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
  4747. input to the next filter.
  4748. It accepts the following parameters:
  4749. @table @option
  4750. @item pix_fmts
  4751. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  4752. apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  4753. @end table
  4754. @subsection Examples
  4755. @itemize
  4756. @item
  4757. Force libavfilter to use a format different from @var{yuv420p} for the
  4758. input to the vflip filter:
  4759. @example
  4760. noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
  4761. @end example
  4762. @item
  4763. Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
  4764. @example
  4765. noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  4766. @end example
  4767. @end itemize
  4768. @section noise
  4769. Add noise on video input frame.
  4770. The filter accepts the following options:
  4771. @table @option
  4772. @item all_seed
  4773. @item c0_seed
  4774. @item c1_seed
  4775. @item c2_seed
  4776. @item c3_seed
  4777. Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4778. of @var{all_seed}. Default value is @code{123457}.
  4779. @item all_strength, alls
  4780. @item c0_strength, c0s
  4781. @item c1_strength, c1s
  4782. @item c2_strength, c2s
  4783. @item c3_strength, c3s
  4784. Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4785. @var{all_strength}. Default value is @code{0}. Allowed range is [0, 100].
  4786. @item all_flags, allf
  4787. @item c0_flags, c0f
  4788. @item c1_flags, c1f
  4789. @item c2_flags, c2f
  4790. @item c3_flags, c3f
  4791. Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if @var{all_flags}.
  4792. Available values for component flags are:
  4793. @table @samp
  4794. @item a
  4795. averaged temporal noise (smoother)
  4796. @item p
  4797. mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
  4798. @item t
  4799. temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
  4800. @item u
  4801. uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
  4802. @end table
  4803. @end table
  4804. @subsection Examples
  4805. Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
  4806. @example
  4807. noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
  4808. @end example
  4809. @section null
  4810. Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
  4811. @section ocv
  4812. Apply a video transform using libopencv.
  4813. To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
  4814. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libopencv}.
  4815. It accepts the following parameters:
  4816. @table @option
  4817. @item filter_name
  4818. The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
  4819. @item filter_params
  4820. The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
  4821. values are assumed.
  4822. @end table
  4823. Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
  4824. information:
  4825. @url{http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html}
  4826. Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
  4827. @anchor{dilate}
  4828. @subsection dilate
  4829. Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4830. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvDilate}.
  4831. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}|@var{nb_iterations}.
  4832. @var{struct_el} represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
  4833. @var{cols}x@var{rows}+@var{anchor_x}x@var{anchor_y}/@var{shape}
  4834. @var{cols} and @var{rows} represent the number of columns and rows of
  4835. the structuring element, @var{anchor_x} and @var{anchor_y} the anchor
  4836. point, and @var{shape} the shape for the structuring element. @var{shape}
  4837. must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
  4838. If the value for @var{shape} is "custom", it must be followed by a
  4839. string of the form "=@var{filename}". The file with name
  4840. @var{filename} is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
  4841. printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
  4842. @var{shape} is used, @var{cols} and @var{rows} are ignored, the number
  4843. or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
  4844. The default value for @var{struct_el} is "3x3+0x0/rect".
  4845. @var{nb_iterations} specifies the number of times the transform is
  4846. applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
  4847. Some examples:
  4848. @example
  4849. # Use the default values
  4850. ocv=dilate
  4851. # Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
  4852. ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
  4853. # Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
  4854. # The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
  4855. # *
  4856. # ***
  4857. # *****
  4858. # ***
  4859. # *
  4860. # The specified columns and rows are ignored
  4861. # but the anchor point coordinates are not
  4862. ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
  4863. @end example
  4864. @subsection erode
  4865. Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4866. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvErode}.
  4867. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}:@var{nb_iterations},
  4868. with the same syntax and semantics as the @ref{dilate} filter.
  4869. @subsection smooth
  4870. Smooth the input video.
  4871. The filter takes the following parameters:
  4872. @var{type}|@var{param1}|@var{param2}|@var{param3}|@var{param4}.
  4873. @var{type} is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
  4874. the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
  4875. or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
  4876. The meaning of @var{param1}, @var{param2}, @var{param3}, and @var{param4}
  4877. depend on the smooth type. @var{param1} and
  4878. @var{param2} accept integer positive values or 0. @var{param3} and
  4879. @var{param4} accept floating point values.
  4880. The default value for @var{param1} is 3. The default value for the
  4881. other parameters is 0.
  4882. These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
  4883. libopencv function @code{cvSmooth}.
  4884. @anchor{overlay}
  4885. @section overlay
  4886. Overlay one video on top of another.
  4887. It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
  4888. video on which the second input is overlayed.
  4889. It accepts the following parameters:
  4890. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4891. @table @option
  4892. @item x
  4893. @item y
  4894. Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlayed video
  4895. on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
  4896. the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
  4897. overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
  4898. @item eof_action
  4899. The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
  4900. one of the following values:
  4901. @table @option
  4902. @item repeat
  4903. Repeat the last frame (the default).
  4904. @item endall
  4905. End both streams.
  4906. @item pass
  4907. Pass the main input through.
  4908. @end table
  4909. @item eval
  4910. Set when the expressions for @option{x}, and @option{y} are evaluated.
  4911. It accepts the following values:
  4912. @table @samp
  4913. @item init
  4914. only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
  4915. when a command is processed
  4916. @item frame
  4917. evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
  4918. @end table
  4919. Default value is @samp{frame}.
  4920. @item shortest
  4921. If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
  4922. terminates. Default value is 0.
  4923. @item format
  4924. Set the format for the output video.
  4925. It accepts the following values:
  4926. @table @samp
  4927. @item yuv420
  4928. force YUV420 output
  4929. @item yuv422
  4930. force YUV422 output
  4931. @item yuv444
  4932. force YUV444 output
  4933. @item rgb
  4934. force RGB output
  4935. @end table
  4936. Default value is @samp{yuv420}.
  4937. @item rgb @emph{(deprecated)}
  4938. If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
  4939. color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
  4940. @option{format} instead.
  4941. @item repeatlast
  4942. If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
  4943. main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
  4944. behavior. Default value is 1.
  4945. @end table
  4946. The @option{x}, and @option{y} expressions can contain the following
  4947. parameters.
  4948. @table @option
  4949. @item main_w, W
  4950. @item main_h, H
  4951. The main input width and height.
  4952. @item overlay_w, w
  4953. @item overlay_h, h
  4954. The overlay input width and height.
  4955. @item x
  4956. @item y
  4957. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  4958. each new frame.
  4959. @item hsub
  4960. @item vsub
  4961. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
  4962. format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and
  4963. @var{vsub} is 1.
  4964. @item n
  4965. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  4966. @item pos
  4967. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  4968. @item t
  4969. The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  4970. @end table
  4971. Note that the @var{n}, @var{pos}, @var{t} variables are available only
  4972. when evaluation is done @emph{per frame}, and will evaluate to NAN
  4973. when @option{eval} is set to @samp{init}.
  4974. Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
  4975. order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
  4976. to pass the two inputs through a @var{setpts=PTS-STARTPTS} filter to
  4977. have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
  4978. the @var{movie} filter does.
  4979. You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
  4980. efficiency of such approach.
  4981. @subsection Commands
  4982. This filter supports the following commands:
  4983. @table @option
  4984. @item x
  4985. @item y
  4986. Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
  4987. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4988. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4989. value.
  4990. @end table
  4991. @subsection Examples
  4992. @itemize
  4993. @item
  4994. Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main
  4995. video:
  4996. @example
  4997. overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10
  4998. @end example
  4999. Using named options the example above becomes:
  5000. @example
  5001. overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10
  5002. @end example
  5003. @item
  5004. Insert a transparent PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input,
  5005. using the @command{ffmpeg} tool with the @code{-filter_complex} option:
  5006. @example
  5007. ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output
  5008. @end example
  5009. @item
  5010. Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom
  5011. right corner) using the @command{ffmpeg} tool:
  5012. @example
  5013. ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output
  5014. @end example
  5015. @item
  5016. Add a transparent color layer on top of the main video; @code{WxH}
  5017. must specify the size of the main input to the overlay filter:
  5018. @example
  5019. color=color=red@@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]
  5020. @end example
  5021. @item
  5022. Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake
  5023. filter) side by side using the @command{ffplay} tool:
  5024. @example
  5025. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'
  5026. @end example
  5027. The above command is the same as:
  5028. @example
  5029. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'
  5030. @end example
  5031. @item
  5032. Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to the right top part of the
  5033. screen starting since time 2:
  5034. @example
  5035. overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0
  5036. @end example
  5037. @item
  5038. Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:
  5039. @example
  5040. ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
  5041. nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
  5042. [0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
  5043. [1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
  5044. [background][left] overlay=shortest=1 [background+left];
  5045. [background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
  5046. "
  5047. @end example
  5048. @item
  5049. Mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section
  5050. @example
  5051. ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
  5052. -vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
  5053. masked.avi
  5054. @end example
  5055. @item
  5056. Chain several overlays in cascade:
  5057. @example
  5058. nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
  5059. testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
  5060. [in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg] overlay=0:0 [mid0];
  5061. [in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0 [mid1];
  5062. [in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100 [mid2];
  5063. [in3] null, [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]
  5064. @end example
  5065. @end itemize
  5066. @section owdenoise
  5067. Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
  5068. The filter accepts the following options:
  5069. @table @option
  5070. @item depth
  5071. Set depth.
  5072. Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
  5073. slow down filtering.
  5074. Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is @code{8}.
  5075. @item luma_strength, ls
  5076. Set luma strength.
  5077. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5078. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5079. Set chroma strength.
  5080. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  5081. @end table
  5082. @section pad
  5083. Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
  5084. provided @var{x}, @var{y} coordinates.
  5085. It accepts the following parameters:
  5086. @table @option
  5087. @item width, w
  5088. @item height, h
  5089. Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
  5090. paddings added. If the value for @var{width} or @var{height} is 0, the
  5091. corresponding input size is used for the output.
  5092. The @var{width} expression can reference the value set by the
  5093. @var{height} expression, and vice versa.
  5094. The default value of @var{width} and @var{height} is 0.
  5095. @item x
  5096. @item y
  5097. Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
  5098. with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
  5099. The @var{x} expression can reference the value set by the @var{y}
  5100. expression, and vice versa.
  5101. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is 0.
  5102. @item color
  5103. Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
  5104. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5105. The default value of @var{color} is "black".
  5106. @end table
  5107. The value for the @var{width}, @var{height}, @var{x}, and @var{y}
  5108. options are expressions containing the following constants:
  5109. @table @option
  5110. @item in_w
  5111. @item in_h
  5112. The input video width and height.
  5113. @item iw
  5114. @item ih
  5115. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5116. @item out_w
  5117. @item out_h
  5118. The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
  5119. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions.
  5120. @item ow
  5121. @item oh
  5122. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  5123. @item x
  5124. @item y
  5125. The x and y offsets as specified by the @var{x} and @var{y}
  5126. expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
  5127. @item a
  5128. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5129. @item sar
  5130. input sample aspect ratio
  5131. @item dar
  5132. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  5133. @item hsub
  5134. @item vsub
  5135. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5136. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5137. @end table
  5138. @subsection Examples
  5139. @itemize
  5140. @item
  5141. Add paddings with the color "violet" to the input video. The output video
  5142. size is 640x480, and the top-left corner of the input video is placed at
  5143. column 0, row 40
  5144. @example
  5145. pad=640:480:0:40:violet
  5146. @end example
  5147. The example above is equivalent to the following command:
  5148. @example
  5149. pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet
  5150. @end example
  5151. @item
  5152. Pad the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2,
  5153. and put the input video at the center of the padded area:
  5154. @example
  5155. pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5156. @end example
  5157. @item
  5158. Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum
  5159. value between the input width and height, and put the input video at
  5160. the center of the padded area:
  5161. @example
  5162. pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5163. @end example
  5164. @item
  5165. Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:
  5166. @example
  5167. pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5168. @end example
  5169. @item
  5170. In case of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect
  5171. correctly, it is necessary to use @var{sar} in the expression,
  5172. according to the relation:
  5173. @example
  5174. (ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
  5175. X = output_dar / sar
  5176. @end example
  5177. Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:
  5178. @example
  5179. pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  5180. @end example
  5181. @item
  5182. Double the output size and put the input video in the bottom-right
  5183. corner of the output padded area:
  5184. @example
  5185. pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"
  5186. @end example
  5187. @end itemize
  5188. @section perspective
  5189. Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
  5190. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5191. @table @option
  5192. @item x0
  5193. @item y0
  5194. @item x1
  5195. @item y1
  5196. @item x2
  5197. @item y2
  5198. @item x3
  5199. @item y3
  5200. Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
  5201. Default values are @code{0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H} with which perspective will remain unchanged.
  5202. If the @code{sense} option is set to @code{source}, then the specified points will be sent
  5203. to the corners of the destination. If the @code{sense} option is set to @code{destination},
  5204. then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.
  5205. The expressions can use the following variables:
  5206. @table @option
  5207. @item W
  5208. @item H
  5209. the width and height of video frame.
  5210. @end table
  5211. @item interpolation
  5212. Set interpolation for perspective correction.
  5213. It accepts the following values:
  5214. @table @samp
  5215. @item linear
  5216. @item cubic
  5217. @end table
  5218. Default value is @samp{linear}.
  5219. @item sense
  5220. Set interpretation of coordinate options.
  5221. It accepts the following values:
  5222. @table @samp
  5223. @item 0, source
  5224. Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
  5225. the corners of the destination.
  5226. @item 1, destination
  5227. Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
  5228. by the given coordinates.
  5229. Default value is @samp{source}.
  5230. @end table
  5231. @end table
  5232. @section phase
  5233. Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
  5234. The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
  5235. opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
  5236. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5237. @table @option
  5238. @item mode
  5239. Set phase mode.
  5240. It accepts the following values:
  5241. @table @samp
  5242. @item t
  5243. Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
  5244. Filter will delay the bottom field.
  5245. @item b
  5246. Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
  5247. Filter will delay the top field.
  5248. @item p
  5249. Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
  5250. for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
  5251. actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
  5252. @item a
  5253. Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
  5254. opposite.
  5255. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} modes on a frame by frame
  5256. basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
  5257. then this works just like @samp{u}.
  5258. @item u
  5259. Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
  5260. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} on a frame by frame basis by
  5261. analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
  5262. match between the fields.
  5263. @item T
  5264. Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5265. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5266. @item B
  5267. Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  5268. Filter selects among @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  5269. @item A
  5270. Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
  5271. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using field flags and
  5272. image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
  5273. like @samp{U}. This is the default mode.
  5274. @item U
  5275. Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
  5276. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis only.
  5277. @end table
  5278. @end table
  5279. @section pixdesctest
  5280. Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
  5281. testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
  5282. For example:
  5283. @example
  5284. format=monow, pixdesctest
  5285. @end example
  5286. can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
  5287. @section pp
  5288. Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
  5289. library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (@code{--enable-gpl}).
  5290. Subfilters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.
  5291. Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
  5292. interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
  5293. The filters accept the following options:
  5294. @table @option
  5295. @item subfilters
  5296. Set postprocessing subfilters string.
  5297. @end table
  5298. All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
  5299. @table @option
  5300. @item a/autoq
  5301. Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
  5302. @item c/chrom
  5303. Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
  5304. @item y/nochrom
  5305. Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
  5306. @item n/noluma
  5307. Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
  5308. @end table
  5309. These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.
  5310. Available subfilters are:
  5311. @table @option
  5312. @item hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5313. Horizontal deblocking filter
  5314. @table @option
  5315. @item difference
  5316. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5317. @item flatness
  5318. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5319. @end table
  5320. @item vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5321. Vertical deblocking filter
  5322. @table @option
  5323. @item difference
  5324. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5325. @item flatness
  5326. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5327. @end table
  5328. @item ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5329. Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
  5330. @table @option
  5331. @item difference
  5332. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5333. @item flatness
  5334. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5335. @end table
  5336. @item va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5337. Accurate vertical deblocking filter
  5338. @table @option
  5339. @item difference
  5340. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5341. @item flatness
  5342. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5343. @end table
  5344. @end table
  5345. The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
  5346. flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
  5347. thresholds.
  5348. @table @option
  5349. @item h1/x1hdeblock
  5350. Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
  5351. @item v1/x1vdeblock
  5352. Experimental vertical deblocking filter
  5353. @item dr/dering
  5354. Deringing filter
  5355. @item tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
  5356. @table @option
  5357. @item threshold1
  5358. larger -> stronger filtering
  5359. @item threshold2
  5360. larger -> stronger filtering
  5361. @item threshold3
  5362. larger -> stronger filtering
  5363. @end table
  5364. @item al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
  5365. @table @option
  5366. @item f/fullyrange
  5367. Stretch luminance to @code{0-255}.
  5368. @end table
  5369. @item lb/linblenddeint
  5370. Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5371. filtering all lines with a @code{(1 2 1)} filter.
  5372. @item li/linipoldeint
  5373. Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5374. linearly interpolating every second line.
  5375. @item ci/cubicipoldeint
  5376. Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
  5377. cubically interpolating every second line.
  5378. @item md/mediandeint
  5379. Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
  5380. median filter to every second line.
  5381. @item fd/ffmpegdeint
  5382. FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
  5383. second line with a @code{(-1 4 2 4 -1)} filter.
  5384. @item l5/lowpass5
  5385. Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
  5386. block by filtering all lines with a @code{(-1 2 6 2 -1)} filter.
  5387. @item fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]
  5388. Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
  5389. specify.
  5390. @table @option
  5391. @item quantizer
  5392. Quantizer to use
  5393. @end table
  5394. @item de/default
  5395. Default pp filter combination (@code{hb|a,vb|a,dr|a})
  5396. @item fa/fast
  5397. Fast pp filter combination (@code{h1|a,v1|a,dr|a})
  5398. @item ac
  5399. High quality pp filter combination (@code{ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a})
  5400. @end table
  5401. @subsection Examples
  5402. @itemize
  5403. @item
  5404. Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
  5405. brightness/contrast:
  5406. @example
  5407. pp=hb/vb/dr/al
  5408. @end example
  5409. @item
  5410. Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
  5411. @example
  5412. pp=de/-al
  5413. @end example
  5414. @item
  5415. Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
  5416. @example
  5417. pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
  5418. @end example
  5419. @item
  5420. Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
  5421. automatically depending on available CPU time:
  5422. @example
  5423. pp=hb|y/vb|a
  5424. @end example
  5425. @end itemize
  5426. @section psnr
  5427. Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
  5428. Ratio) between two input videos.
  5429. This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
  5430. considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
  5431. output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
  5432. the PSNR.
  5433. Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
  5434. this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
  5435. have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
  5436. The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
  5437. The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
  5438. frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
  5439. equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
  5440. @example
  5441. PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
  5442. @end example
  5443. Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
  5444. image.
  5445. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5446. @table @option
  5447. @item stats_file, f
  5448. If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
  5449. each individual frame.
  5450. @end table
  5451. The file printed if @var{stats_file} is selected, contains a sequence of
  5452. key/value pairs of the form @var{key}:@var{value} for each compared
  5453. couple of frames.
  5454. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  5455. @table @option
  5456. @item n
  5457. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
  5458. @item mse_avg
  5459. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5460. frames, averaged over all the image components.
  5461. @item mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a
  5462. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5463. frames for the component specified by the suffix.
  5464. @item psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a
  5465. Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
  5466. specified by the suffix.
  5467. @end table
  5468. For example:
  5469. @example
  5470. movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  5471. [main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
  5472. @end example
  5473. On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
  5474. reference file @file{ref_movie.mpg}. The PSNR of each individual frame
  5475. is stored in @file{stats.log}.
  5476. @anchor{pullup}
  5477. @section pullup
  5478. Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
  5479. hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
  5480. content.
  5481. The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
  5482. its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
  5483. onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
  5484. fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
  5485. To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
  5486. pullup, use @code{fps=24000/1001} if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
  5487. @code{fps=24} for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
  5488. The filter accepts the following options:
  5489. @table @option
  5490. @item jl
  5491. @item jr
  5492. @item jt
  5493. @item jb
  5494. These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
  5495. bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
  5496. while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
  5497. The default is 8 pixels on each side.
  5498. @item sb
  5499. Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
  5500. filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
  5501. excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
  5502. Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
  5503. This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
  5504. the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
  5505. Default value is @code{0}.
  5506. @item mp
  5507. Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
  5508. @table @samp
  5509. @item l
  5510. Use luma plane.
  5511. @item u
  5512. Use chroma blue plane.
  5513. @item v
  5514. Use chroma red plane.
  5515. @end table
  5516. This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
  5517. for doing filter's computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
  5518. source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
  5519. is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
  5520. The main purpose of setting @option{mp} to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
  5521. load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
  5522. @end table
  5523. For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
  5524. necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
  5525. telecine NTSC input:
  5526. @example
  5527. ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
  5528. @end example
  5529. @section removelogo
  5530. Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
  5531. pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
  5532. comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
  5533. The filter accepts the following options:
  5534. @table @option
  5535. @item filename, f
  5536. Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
  5537. libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
  5538. video stream being processed.
  5539. @end table
  5540. Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
  5541. considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
  5542. the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
  5543. rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
  5544. recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
  5545. visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
  5546. filter once or twice.
  5547. If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
  5548. logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
  5549. reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
  5550. much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
  5551. the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
  5552. pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
  5553. @section rotate
  5554. Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
  5555. The filter accepts the following options:
  5556. A description of the optional parameters follows.
  5557. @table @option
  5558. @item angle, a
  5559. Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
  5560. clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
  5561. result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
  5562. This expression is evaluated for each frame.
  5563. @item out_w, ow
  5564. Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
  5565. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5566. @item out_h, oh
  5567. Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
  5568. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5569. @item bilinear
  5570. Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
  5571. it. Default value is 1.
  5572. @item fillcolor, c
  5573. Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
  5574. image. For the generalsyntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  5575. ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
  5576. background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
  5577. Default value is "black".
  5578. @end table
  5579. The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
  5580. following constants and functions:
  5581. @table @option
  5582. @item n
  5583. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
  5584. before the first frame is filtered.
  5585. @item t
  5586. time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
  5587. configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
  5588. @item hsub
  5589. @item vsub
  5590. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5591. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5592. @item in_w, iw
  5593. @item in_h, ih
  5594. the input video width and height
  5595. @item out_w, ow
  5596. @item out_h, oh
  5597. the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
  5598. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions
  5599. @item rotw(a)
  5600. @item roth(a)
  5601. the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
  5602. video rotated by @var{a} radians.
  5603. These are only available when computing the @option{out_w} and
  5604. @option{out_h} expressions.
  5605. @end table
  5606. @subsection Examples
  5607. @itemize
  5608. @item
  5609. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
  5610. @example
  5611. rotate=PI/6
  5612. @end example
  5613. @item
  5614. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
  5615. @example
  5616. rotate=-PI/6
  5617. @end example
  5618. @item
  5619. Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
  5620. @example
  5621. rotate=45*PI/180
  5622. @end example
  5623. @item
  5624. Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
  5625. @example
  5626. rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T
  5627. @end example
  5628. @item
  5629. Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
  5630. seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
  5631. @example
  5632. rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
  5633. @end example
  5634. @item
  5635. Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
  5636. input video is always completely contained in the output:
  5637. @example
  5638. rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
  5639. @end example
  5640. @item
  5641. Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
  5642. shown:
  5643. @example
  5644. rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
  5645. @end example
  5646. @end itemize
  5647. @subsection Commands
  5648. The filter supports the following commands:
  5649. @table @option
  5650. @item a, angle
  5651. Set the angle expression.
  5652. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  5653. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  5654. value.
  5655. @end table
  5656. @section sab
  5657. Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
  5658. The filter accepts the following options:
  5659. @table @option
  5660. @item luma_radius, lr
  5661. Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
  5662. value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
  5663. in slower processing.
  5664. @item luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr
  5665. Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
  5666. value is 1.0.
  5667. @item luma_strength, ls
  5668. Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
  5669. be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
  5670. @item chroma_radius, cr
  5671. Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
  5672. greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
  5673. processing.
  5674. @item chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr
  5675. Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
  5676. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5677. Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
  5678. must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
  5679. @end table
  5680. Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
  5681. corresponding luma option value.
  5682. @anchor{scale}
  5683. @section scale
  5684. Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
  5685. The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
  5686. of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
  5687. If the input image format is different from the format requested by
  5688. the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
  5689. requested format.
  5690. @subsection Options
  5691. The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
  5692. supported by the libswscale scaler.
  5693. See @ref{scaler_options,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for
  5694. the complete list of scaler options.
  5695. @table @option
  5696. @item width, w
  5697. @item height, h
  5698. Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
  5699. dimension.
  5700. If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
  5701. If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
  5702. maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
  5703. other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
  5704. used
  5705. If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
  5706. that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
  5707. specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
  5708. dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
  5709. See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
  5710. expression.
  5711. @item interl
  5712. Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
  5713. @table @samp
  5714. @item 1
  5715. Force interlaced aware scaling.
  5716. @item 0
  5717. Do not apply interlaced scaling.
  5718. @item -1
  5719. Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
  5720. are flagged as interlaced or not.
  5721. @end table
  5722. Default value is @samp{0}.
  5723. @item flags
  5724. Set libswscale scaling flags. See
  5725. @ref{sws_flags,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for the
  5726. complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
  5727. the default flags.
  5728. @item size, s
  5729. Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5730. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5731. @item in_color_matrix
  5732. @item out_color_matrix
  5733. Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
  5734. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5735. a specific value used for the output and encoder.
  5736. If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
  5737. Possible values:
  5738. @table @samp
  5739. @item auto
  5740. Choose automatically.
  5741. @item bt709
  5742. Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
  5743. Recommendation BT.709.
  5744. @item fcc
  5745. Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
  5746. Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
  5747. @item bt601
  5748. Set color space conforming to:
  5749. @itemize
  5750. @item
  5751. ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
  5752. @item
  5753. ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
  5754. @item
  5755. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
  5756. @end itemize
  5757. @item smpte240m
  5758. Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
  5759. @end table
  5760. @item in_range
  5761. @item out_range
  5762. Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
  5763. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5764. a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
  5765. range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
  5766. @table @samp
  5767. @item auto
  5768. Choose automatically.
  5769. @item jpeg/full/pc
  5770. Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5771. @item mpeg/tv
  5772. Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5773. @end table
  5774. @item force_original_aspect_ratio
  5775. Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
  5776. keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
  5777. @table @samp
  5778. @item disable
  5779. Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
  5780. @item decrease
  5781. The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
  5782. @item increase
  5783. The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
  5784. @end table
  5785. One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
  5786. maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
  5787. that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
  5788. 1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
  5789. decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
  5790. 1280x533.
  5791. Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for @option{w}
  5792. or @option{h}, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
  5793. to work.
  5794. @end table
  5795. The values of the @option{w} and @option{h} options are expressions
  5796. containing the following constants:
  5797. @table @var
  5798. @item in_w
  5799. @item in_h
  5800. The input width and height
  5801. @item iw
  5802. @item ih
  5803. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5804. @item out_w
  5805. @item out_h
  5806. The output (scaled) width and height
  5807. @item ow
  5808. @item oh
  5809. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  5810. @item a
  5811. The same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5812. @item sar
  5813. input sample aspect ratio
  5814. @item dar
  5815. The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from @code{(iw / ih) * sar}.
  5816. @item hsub
  5817. @item vsub
  5818. horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5819. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5820. @item ohsub
  5821. @item ovsub
  5822. horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5823. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5824. @end table
  5825. @subsection Examples
  5826. @itemize
  5827. @item
  5828. Scale the input video to a size of 200x100
  5829. @example
  5830. scale=w=200:h=100
  5831. @end example
  5832. This is equivalent to:
  5833. @example
  5834. scale=200:100
  5835. @end example
  5836. or:
  5837. @example
  5838. scale=200x100
  5839. @end example
  5840. @item
  5841. Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:
  5842. @example
  5843. scale=qcif
  5844. @end example
  5845. which can also be written as:
  5846. @example
  5847. scale=size=qcif
  5848. @end example
  5849. @item
  5850. Scale the input to 2x:
  5851. @example
  5852. scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih
  5853. @end example
  5854. @item
  5855. The above is the same as:
  5856. @example
  5857. scale=2*in_w:2*in_h
  5858. @end example
  5859. @item
  5860. Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:
  5861. @example
  5862. scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1
  5863. @end example
  5864. @item
  5865. Scale the input to half size:
  5866. @example
  5867. scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2
  5868. @end example
  5869. @item
  5870. Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:
  5871. @example
  5872. scale=3/2*iw:ow
  5873. @end example
  5874. @item
  5875. Seek Greek harmony:
  5876. @example
  5877. scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
  5878. scale=ih*PHI:ih
  5879. @end example
  5880. @item
  5881. Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:
  5882. @example
  5883. scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih
  5884. @end example
  5885. @item
  5886. Increase the size, making the size a multiple of the chroma
  5887. subsample values:
  5888. @example
  5889. scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"
  5890. @end example
  5891. @item
  5892. Increase the width to a maximum of 500 pixels,
  5893. keeping the same aspect ratio as the input:
  5894. @example
  5895. scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'
  5896. @end example
  5897. @end itemize
  5898. @section separatefields
  5899. The @code{separatefields} takes a frame-based video input and splits
  5900. each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
  5901. with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
  5902. This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
  5903. of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
  5904. If it gets it wrong use @ref{setfield} filter before @code{separatefields} filter.
  5905. @section setdar, setsar
  5906. The @code{setdar} filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
  5907. output video.
  5908. This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
  5909. Ratio, according to the following equation:
  5910. @example
  5911. @var{DAR} = @var{HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION} / @var{VERTICAL_RESOLUTION} * @var{SAR}
  5912. @end example
  5913. Keep in mind that the @code{setdar} filter does not modify the pixel
  5914. dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
  5915. this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
  5916. e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
  5917. applied.
  5918. The @code{setsar} filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
  5919. the filter output video.
  5920. Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
  5921. output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
  5922. above.
  5923. Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the @code{setsar}
  5924. filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
  5925. another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
  5926. It accepts the following parameters:
  5927. @table @option
  5928. @item r, ratio, dar (@code{setdar} only), sar (@code{setsar} only)
  5929. Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
  5930. The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
  5931. a string of the form @var{num}:@var{den}, where @var{num} and
  5932. @var{den} are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
  5933. the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
  5934. In case the form "@var{num}:@var{den}" is used, the @code{:} character
  5935. should be escaped.
  5936. @item max
  5937. Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
  5938. denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
  5939. Default value is @code{100}.
  5940. @end table
  5941. The parameter @var{sar} is an expression containing
  5942. the following constants:
  5943. @table @option
  5944. @item E, PI, PHI
  5945. These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
  5946. (Euler's number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
  5947. @item w, h
  5948. The input width and height.
  5949. @item a
  5950. These are the same as @var{w} / @var{h}.
  5951. @item sar
  5952. The input sample aspect ratio.
  5953. @item dar
  5954. The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
  5955. (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  5956. @item hsub, vsub
  5957. Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  5958. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5959. @end table
  5960. @subsection Examples
  5961. @itemize
  5962. @item
  5963. To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
  5964. @example
  5965. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5966. setdar=dar=16/9
  5967. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5968. @end example
  5969. @item
  5970. To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
  5971. @example
  5972. setsar=sar=10/11
  5973. @end example
  5974. @item
  5975. To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
  5976. 1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
  5977. @example
  5978. setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
  5979. @end example
  5980. @end itemize
  5981. @anchor{setfield}
  5982. @section setfield
  5983. Force field for the output video frame.
  5984. The @code{setfield} filter marks the interlace type field for the
  5985. output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
  5986. corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
  5987. following filters (e.g. @code{fieldorder} or @code{yadif}).
  5988. The filter accepts the following options:
  5989. @table @option
  5990. @item mode
  5991. Available values are:
  5992. @table @samp
  5993. @item auto
  5994. Keep the same field property.
  5995. @item bff
  5996. Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
  5997. @item tff
  5998. Mark the frame as top-field-first.
  5999. @item prog
  6000. Mark the frame as progressive.
  6001. @end table
  6002. @end table
  6003. @section showinfo
  6004. Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
  6005. The input video is not modified.
  6006. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  6007. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  6008. The following values are shown in the output:
  6009. @table @option
  6010. @item n
  6011. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  6012. @item pts
  6013. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  6014. time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
  6015. @item pts_time
  6016. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  6017. seconds.
  6018. @item pos
  6019. The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
  6020. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
  6021. @item fmt
  6022. The pixel format name.
  6023. @item sar
  6024. The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
  6025. @var{num}/@var{den}.
  6026. @item s
  6027. The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  6028. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6029. @item i
  6030. The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
  6031. for bottom field first).
  6032. @item iskey
  6033. This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
  6034. @item type
  6035. The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
  6036. P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
  6037. Also refer to the documentation of the @code{AVPictureType} enum and of
  6038. the @code{av_get_picture_type_char} function defined in
  6039. @file{libavutil/avutil.h}.
  6040. @item checksum
  6041. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
  6042. @item plane_checksum
  6043. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
  6044. expressed in the form "[@var{c0} @var{c1} @var{c2} @var{c3}]".
  6045. @end table
  6046. @section shuffleplanes
  6047. Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
  6048. It accepts the following parameters:
  6049. @table @option
  6050. @item map0
  6051. The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
  6052. @item map1
  6053. The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
  6054. @item map2
  6055. The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
  6056. @item map3
  6057. The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
  6058. @end table
  6059. The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
  6060. Swap the second and third planes of the input:
  6061. @example
  6062. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
  6063. @end example
  6064. @section signalstats
  6065. Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
  6066. with the digitization of analog video media.
  6067. By default the filter will log these metadata values:
  6068. @table @option
  6069. @item YMIN
  6070. Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6071. range of [0-255].
  6072. @item YLOW
  6073. Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6074. range of [0-255].
  6075. @item YAVG
  6076. Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6077. [0-255].
  6078. @item YHIGH
  6079. Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6080. range of [0-255].
  6081. @item YMAX
  6082. Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6083. range of [0-255].
  6084. @item UMIN
  6085. Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6086. range of [0-255].
  6087. @item ULOW
  6088. Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6089. range of [0-255].
  6090. @item UAVG
  6091. Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6092. [0-255].
  6093. @item UHIGH
  6094. Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6095. range of [0-255].
  6096. @item UMAX
  6097. Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6098. range of [0-255].
  6099. @item VMIN
  6100. Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6101. range of [0-255].
  6102. @item VLOW
  6103. Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6104. range of [0-255].
  6105. @item VAVG
  6106. Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6107. [0-255].
  6108. @item VHIGH
  6109. Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
  6110. range of [0-255].
  6111. @item VMAX
  6112. Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
  6113. range of [0-255].
  6114. @item SATMIN
  6115. Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6116. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6117. @item SATLOW
  6118. Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
  6119. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6120. @item SATAVG
  6121. Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
  6122. of [0-~181.02].
  6123. @item SATHIGH
  6124. Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
  6125. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6126. @item SATMAX
  6127. Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
  6128. Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
  6129. @item HUEMED
  6130. Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6131. [0-360].
  6132. @item HUEAVG
  6133. Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
  6134. [0-360].
  6135. @item YDIF
  6136. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
  6137. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6138. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6139. @item UDIF
  6140. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
  6141. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6142. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6143. @item VDIF
  6144. Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
  6145. plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
  6146. Expressed in range of [0-255].
  6147. @end table
  6148. The filter accepts the following options:
  6149. @table @option
  6150. @item stat
  6151. @item out
  6152. @option{stat} specify an additional form of image analysis.
  6153. @option{out} output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
  6154. Both options accept the following values:
  6155. @table @samp
  6156. @item tout
  6157. Identify @var{temporal outliers} pixels. A @var{temporal outlier} is a pixel
  6158. unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
  6159. include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
  6160. @item vrep
  6161. Identify @var{vertical line repetition}. Vertical line repetition includes
  6162. similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
  6163. repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
  6164. analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
  6165. analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
  6166. @item brng
  6167. Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
  6168. @end table
  6169. @item color, c
  6170. Set the highlight color for the @option{out} option. The default color is
  6171. yellow.
  6172. @end table
  6173. @subsection Examples
  6174. @itemize
  6175. @item
  6176. Output data of various video metrics:
  6177. @example
  6178. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats="stat=tout+vrep+brng" -show_frames
  6179. @end example
  6180. @item
  6181. Output specific data about the minimum and maximum values of the Y plane per frame:
  6182. @example
  6183. ffprobe -f lavfi movie=example.mov,signalstats -show_entries frame_tags=lavfi.signalstats.YMAX,lavfi.signalstats.YMIN
  6184. @end example
  6185. @item
  6186. Playback video while highlighting pixels that are outside of broadcast range in red.
  6187. @example
  6188. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats="out=brng:color=red"
  6189. @end example
  6190. @item
  6191. Playback video with signalstats metadata drawn over the frame.
  6192. @example
  6193. ffplay example.mov -vf signalstats=stat=brng+vrep+tout,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=signalstat_drawtext.txt
  6194. @end example
  6195. The contents of signalstat_drawtext.txt used in the command are:
  6196. @example
  6197. time %@{pts:hms@}
  6198. Y (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.YMAX@})
  6199. U (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.UMAX@})
  6200. V (%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMIN@}-%@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.VMAX@})
  6201. saturation maximum: %@{metadata:lavfi.signalstats.SATMAX@}
  6202. @end example
  6203. @end itemize
  6204. @anchor{smartblur}
  6205. @section smartblur
  6206. Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
  6207. It accepts the following options:
  6208. @table @option
  6209. @item luma_radius, lr
  6210. Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6211. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6212. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6213. @item luma_strength, ls
  6214. Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6215. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6216. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6217. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6218. @item luma_threshold, lt
  6219. Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6220. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6221. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6222. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6223. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6224. @item chroma_radius, cr
  6225. Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  6226. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  6227. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  6228. @item chroma_strength, cs
  6229. Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
  6230. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  6231. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  6232. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  6233. @item chroma_threshold, ct
  6234. Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  6235. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  6236. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  6237. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  6238. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  6239. @end table
  6240. If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
  6241. is set.
  6242. @section stereo3d
  6243. Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
  6244. The filters accept the following options:
  6245. @table @option
  6246. @item in
  6247. Set stereoscopic image format of input.
  6248. Available values for input image formats are:
  6249. @table @samp
  6250. @item sbsl
  6251. side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
  6252. @item sbsr
  6253. side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
  6254. @item sbs2l
  6255. side by side parallel with half width resolution
  6256. (left eye left, right eye right)
  6257. @item sbs2r
  6258. side by side crosseye with half width resolution
  6259. (right eye left, left eye right)
  6260. @item abl
  6261. above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
  6262. @item abr
  6263. above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
  6264. @item ab2l
  6265. above-below with half height resolution
  6266. (left eye above, right eye below)
  6267. @item ab2r
  6268. above-below with half height resolution
  6269. (right eye above, left eye below)
  6270. @item al
  6271. alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
  6272. @item ar
  6273. alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
  6274. Default value is @samp{sbsl}.
  6275. @end table
  6276. @item out
  6277. Set stereoscopic image format of output.
  6278. Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
  6279. @table @samp
  6280. @item arbg
  6281. anaglyph red/blue gray
  6282. (red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6283. @item argg
  6284. anaglyph red/green gray
  6285. (red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
  6286. @item arcg
  6287. anaglyph red/cyan gray
  6288. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6289. @item arch
  6290. anaglyph red/cyan half colored
  6291. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6292. @item arcc
  6293. anaglyph red/cyan color
  6294. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6295. @item arcd
  6296. anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6297. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  6298. @item agmg
  6299. anaglyph green/magenta gray
  6300. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6301. @item agmh
  6302. anaglyph green/magenta half colored
  6303. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6304. @item agmc
  6305. anaglyph green/magenta colored
  6306. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6307. @item agmd
  6308. anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6309. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  6310. @item aybg
  6311. anaglyph yellow/blue gray
  6312. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6313. @item aybh
  6314. anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
  6315. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6316. @item aybc
  6317. anaglyph yellow/blue colored
  6318. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6319. @item aybd
  6320. anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  6321. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  6322. @item irl
  6323. interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
  6324. @item irr
  6325. interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
  6326. @item ml
  6327. mono output (left eye only)
  6328. @item mr
  6329. mono output (right eye only)
  6330. @end table
  6331. Default value is @samp{arcd}.
  6332. @end table
  6333. @subsection Examples
  6334. @itemize
  6335. @item
  6336. Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
  6337. @example
  6338. stereo3d=sbsl:aybd
  6339. @end example
  6340. @item
  6341. Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
  6342. @example
  6343. stereo3d=abl:sbsr
  6344. @end example
  6345. @end itemize
  6346. @section spp
  6347. Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
  6348. at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{6} - all) shifts
  6349. and average the results.
  6350. The filter accepts the following options:
  6351. @table @option
  6352. @item quality
  6353. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  6354. an integer in the range 0-6. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  6355. effect. A value of @code{6} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  6356. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  6357. @code{3}.
  6358. @item qp
  6359. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  6360. from the video stream (if available).
  6361. @item mode
  6362. Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
  6363. @table @samp
  6364. @item hard
  6365. Set hard thresholding (default).
  6366. @item soft
  6367. Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
  6368. @end table
  6369. @item use_bframe_qp
  6370. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  6371. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  6372. @code{0} (not enabled).
  6373. @end table
  6374. @anchor{subtitles}
  6375. @section subtitles
  6376. Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
  6377. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6378. @code{--enable-libass}. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
  6379. libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
  6380. Alpha) subtitles format.
  6381. The filter accepts the following options:
  6382. @table @option
  6383. @item filename, f
  6384. Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
  6385. @item original_size
  6386. Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
  6387. was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
  6388. the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
  6389. this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
  6390. changed.
  6391. @item charenc
  6392. Set subtitles input character encoding. @code{subtitles} filter only. Only
  6393. useful if not UTF-8.
  6394. @item stream_index, si
  6395. Set subtitles stream index. @code{subtitles} filter only.
  6396. @end table
  6397. If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
  6398. specifies the @option{filename}.
  6399. For example, to render the file @file{sub.srt} on top of the input
  6400. video, use the command:
  6401. @example
  6402. subtitles=sub.srt
  6403. @end example
  6404. which is equivalent to:
  6405. @example
  6406. subtitles=filename=sub.srt
  6407. @end example
  6408. To render the default subtitles stream from file @file{video.mkv}, use:
  6409. @example
  6410. subtitles=video.mkv
  6411. @end example
  6412. To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
  6413. @example
  6414. subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
  6415. @end example
  6416. @section super2xsai
  6417. Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
  6418. Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
  6419. Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
  6420. @section swapuv
  6421. Swap U & V plane.
  6422. @section telecine
  6423. Apply telecine process to the video.
  6424. This filter accepts the following options:
  6425. @table @option
  6426. @item first_field
  6427. @table @samp
  6428. @item top, t
  6429. top field first
  6430. @item bottom, b
  6431. bottom field first
  6432. The default value is @code{top}.
  6433. @end table
  6434. @item pattern
  6435. A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
  6436. The default value is @code{23}.
  6437. @end table
  6438. @example
  6439. Some typical patterns:
  6440. NTSC output (30i):
  6441. 27.5p: 32222
  6442. 24p: 23 (classic)
  6443. 24p: 2332 (preferred)
  6444. 20p: 33
  6445. 18p: 334
  6446. 16p: 3444
  6447. PAL output (25i):
  6448. 27.5p: 12222
  6449. 24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
  6450. 16.67p: 33
  6451. 16p: 33333334
  6452. @end example
  6453. @section thumbnail
  6454. Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
  6455. The filter accepts the following options:
  6456. @table @option
  6457. @item n
  6458. Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of @var{n} frames, the filter
  6459. will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of @var{n} frames until
  6460. the end. Default is @code{100}.
  6461. @end table
  6462. Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger @var{n}
  6463. value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
  6464. @subsection Examples
  6465. @itemize
  6466. @item
  6467. Extract one picture each 50 frames:
  6468. @example
  6469. thumbnail=50
  6470. @end example
  6471. @item
  6472. Complete example of a thumbnail creation with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6473. @example
  6474. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
  6475. @end example
  6476. @end itemize
  6477. @section tile
  6478. Tile several successive frames together.
  6479. The filter accepts the following options:
  6480. @table @option
  6481. @item layout
  6482. Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
  6483. this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6484. @item nb_frames
  6485. Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
  6486. than or equal to @var{w}x@var{h}. The default value is @code{0}, meaning all
  6487. the area will be used.
  6488. @item margin
  6489. Set the outer border margin in pixels.
  6490. @item padding
  6491. Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
  6492. more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
  6493. refer to the pad video filter.
  6494. @item color
  6495. Specify the color of the unused areaFor the syntax of this option, check the
  6496. "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of @var{color}
  6497. is "black".
  6498. @end table
  6499. @subsection Examples
  6500. @itemize
  6501. @item
  6502. Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (@option{-skip_frame nokey}) in a movie:
  6503. @example
  6504. ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png
  6505. @end example
  6506. The @option{-vsync 0} is necessary to prevent @command{ffmpeg} from
  6507. duplicating each output frame to accommodate the originally detected frame
  6508. rate.
  6509. @item
  6510. Display @code{5} pictures in an area of @code{3x2} frames,
  6511. with @code{7} pixels between them, and @code{2} pixels of initial margin, using
  6512. mixed flat and named options:
  6513. @example
  6514. tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2
  6515. @end example
  6516. @end itemize
  6517. @section tinterlace
  6518. Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
  6519. Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
  6520. considered odd.
  6521. The filter accepts the following options:
  6522. @table @option
  6523. @item mode
  6524. Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
  6525. as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
  6526. Available values are:
  6527. @table @samp
  6528. @item merge, 0
  6529. Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
  6530. generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
  6531. @item drop_odd, 1
  6532. Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6533. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6534. @item drop_even, 2
  6535. Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6536. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6537. @item pad, 3
  6538. Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
  6539. generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
  6540. @item interleave_top, 4
  6541. Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
  6542. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6543. @item interleave_bottom, 5
  6544. Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
  6545. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6546. @item interlacex2, 6
  6547. Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
  6548. containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
  6549. the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
  6550. the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
  6551. field synchronisation.
  6552. @end table
  6553. Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
  6554. compatibility reasons.
  6555. Default mode is @code{merge}.
  6556. @item flags
  6557. Specify flags influencing the filter process.
  6558. Available value for @var{flags} is:
  6559. @table @option
  6560. @item low_pass_filter, vlfp
  6561. Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
  6562. Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
  6563. destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
  6564. vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
  6565. patterning.
  6566. Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for @option{mode}
  6567. @var{interleave_top} and @var{interleave_bottom}.
  6568. @end table
  6569. @end table
  6570. @section transpose
  6571. Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
  6572. It accepts the following parameters:
  6573. @table @option
  6574. @item dir
  6575. Specify the transposition direction.
  6576. Can assume the following values:
  6577. @table @samp
  6578. @item 0, 4, cclock_flip
  6579. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
  6580. @example
  6581. L.R L.l
  6582. . . -> . .
  6583. l.r R.r
  6584. @end example
  6585. @item 1, 5, clock
  6586. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
  6587. @example
  6588. L.R l.L
  6589. . . -> . .
  6590. l.r r.R
  6591. @end example
  6592. @item 2, 6, cclock
  6593. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
  6594. @example
  6595. L.R R.r
  6596. . . -> . .
  6597. l.r L.l
  6598. @end example
  6599. @item 3, 7, clock_flip
  6600. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
  6601. @example
  6602. L.R r.R
  6603. . . -> . .
  6604. l.r l.L
  6605. @end example
  6606. @end table
  6607. For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
  6608. video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
  6609. deprecated, the @code{passthrough} option should be used instead.
  6610. Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
  6611. symbolic constants.
  6612. @item passthrough
  6613. Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
  6614. specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
  6615. @table @samp
  6616. @item none
  6617. Always apply transposition.
  6618. @item portrait
  6619. Preserve portrait geometry (when @var{height} >= @var{width}).
  6620. @item landscape
  6621. Preserve landscape geometry (when @var{width} >= @var{height}).
  6622. @end table
  6623. Default value is @code{none}.
  6624. @end table
  6625. For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
  6626. layout:
  6627. @example
  6628. transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
  6629. @end example
  6630. The command above can also be specified as:
  6631. @example
  6632. transpose=1:portrait
  6633. @end example
  6634. @section trim
  6635. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  6636. It accepts the following parameters:
  6637. @table @option
  6638. @item start
  6639. Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
  6640. timestamp @var{start} will be the first frame in the output.
  6641. @item end
  6642. Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
  6643. immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be the last
  6644. frame in the output.
  6645. @item start_pts
  6646. This is the same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp
  6647. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6648. @item end_pts
  6649. This is the same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp
  6650. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6651. @item duration
  6652. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  6653. @item start_frame
  6654. The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
  6655. @item end_frame
  6656. The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
  6657. @end table
  6658. @option{start}, @option{end}, and @option{duration} are expressed as time
  6659. duration specifications; see
  6660. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  6661. for the accepted syntax.
  6662. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  6663. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
  6664. frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
  6665. the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
  6666. setpts filter after the trim filter.
  6667. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  6668. keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  6669. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
  6670. filters.
  6671. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  6672. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  6673. Examples:
  6674. @itemize
  6675. @item
  6676. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  6677. @example
  6678. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
  6679. @end example
  6680. @item
  6681. Keep only the first second:
  6682. @example
  6683. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
  6684. @end example
  6685. @end itemize
  6686. @anchor{unsharp}
  6687. @section unsharp
  6688. Sharpen or blur the input video.
  6689. It accepts the following parameters:
  6690. @table @option
  6691. @item luma_msize_x, lx
  6692. Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
  6693. 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6694. @item luma_msize_y, ly
  6695. Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
  6696. and 63. The default value is 5.
  6697. @item luma_amount, la
  6698. Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6699. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6700. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6701. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6702. Default value is 1.0.
  6703. @item chroma_msize_x, cx
  6704. Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
  6705. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6706. @item chroma_msize_y, cy
  6707. Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
  6708. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6709. @item chroma_amount, ca
  6710. Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6711. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6712. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6713. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6714. Default value is 0.0.
  6715. @item opencl
  6716. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  6717. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  6718. @end table
  6719. All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
  6720. string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.
  6721. @subsection Examples
  6722. @itemize
  6723. @item
  6724. Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
  6725. @example
  6726. unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
  6727. @end example
  6728. @item
  6729. Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
  6730. @example
  6731. unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2
  6732. @end example
  6733. @end itemize
  6734. @anchor{vidstabdetect}
  6735. @section vidstabdetect
  6736. Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
  6737. @ref{vidstabtransform} for pass 2.
  6738. This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
  6739. transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
  6740. the @ref{vidstabtransform} filter.
  6741. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6742. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6743. This filter accepts the following options:
  6744. @table @option
  6745. @item result
  6746. Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
  6747. Default value is @file{transforms.trf}.
  6748. @item shakiness
  6749. Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
  6750. integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
  6751. value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
  6752. @item accuracy
  6753. Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
  6754. range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
  6755. accuracy. Default value is 15.
  6756. @item stepsize
  6757. Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
  6758. scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
  6759. @item mincontrast
  6760. Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
  6761. discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
  6762. value is 0.3.
  6763. @item tripod
  6764. Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
  6765. If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
  6766. in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
  6767. is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
  6768. the camera view absolutely still.
  6769. If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
  6770. @item show
  6771. Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
  6772. integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
  6773. visualization.
  6774. @end table
  6775. @subsection Examples
  6776. @itemize
  6777. @item
  6778. Use default values:
  6779. @example
  6780. vidstabdetect
  6781. @end example
  6782. @item
  6783. Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
  6784. @file{mytransforms.trf}:
  6785. @example
  6786. vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
  6787. @end example
  6788. @item
  6789. Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
  6790. video:
  6791. @example
  6792. vidstabdetect=show=1
  6793. @end example
  6794. @item
  6795. Analyze a video with medium shakiness using @command{ffmpeg}:
  6796. @example
  6797. ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
  6798. @end example
  6799. @end itemize
  6800. @anchor{vidstabtransform}
  6801. @section vidstabtransform
  6802. Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
  6803. see @ref{vidstabdetect} for pass 1.
  6804. Read a file with transform information for each frame and
  6805. apply/compensate them. Together with the @ref{vidstabdetect}
  6806. filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
  6807. @url{http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab}. It is important to also use
  6808. the @ref{unsharp} filter, see below.
  6809. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6810. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6811. @subsection Options
  6812. @table @option
  6813. @item input
  6814. Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
  6815. @file{transforms.trf}.
  6816. @item smoothing
  6817. Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
  6818. camera movements. Default value is 10.
  6819. For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
  6820. past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
  6821. larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
  6822. the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
  6823. camera is simulated.
  6824. @item optalgo
  6825. Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
  6826. Accepted values are:
  6827. @table @samp
  6828. @item gauss
  6829. gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
  6830. @item avg
  6831. averaging on transformations
  6832. @end table
  6833. @item maxshift
  6834. Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
  6835. meaning no limit.
  6836. @item maxangle
  6837. Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
  6838. value is -1, meaning no limit.
  6839. @item crop
  6840. Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
  6841. compensation.
  6842. Available values are:
  6843. @table @samp
  6844. @item keep
  6845. keep image information from previous frame (default)
  6846. @item black
  6847. fill the border black
  6848. @end table
  6849. @item invert
  6850. Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
  6851. @item relative
  6852. Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
  6853. absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
  6854. @item zoom
  6855. Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
  6856. effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
  6857. zoom).
  6858. @item optzoom
  6859. Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
  6860. Accepted values are:
  6861. @table @samp
  6862. @item 0
  6863. disabled
  6864. @item 1
  6865. optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
  6866. will lead to visible borders) (default)
  6867. @item 2
  6868. optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
  6869. visible), see @option{zoomspeed}
  6870. @end table
  6871. Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
  6872. @item zoomspeed
  6873. Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
  6874. @option{optzoom} is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
  6875. 0.25.
  6876. @item interpol
  6877. Specify type of interpolation.
  6878. Available values are:
  6879. @table @samp
  6880. @item no
  6881. no interpolation
  6882. @item linear
  6883. linear only horizontal
  6884. @item bilinear
  6885. linear in both directions (default)
  6886. @item bicubic
  6887. cubic in both directions (slow)
  6888. @end table
  6889. @item tripod
  6890. Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
  6891. @code{relative=0:smoothing=0}. Default value is 0.
  6892. Use also @code{tripod} option of @ref{vidstabdetect}.
  6893. @item debug
  6894. Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
  6895. are written to the temporary file @file{global_motions.trf}. Default
  6896. value is 0.
  6897. @end table
  6898. @subsection Examples
  6899. @itemize
  6900. @item
  6901. Use @command{ffmpeg} for a typical stabilization with default values:
  6902. @example
  6903. ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg
  6904. @end example
  6905. Note the use of the @ref{unsharp} filter which is always recommended.
  6906. @item
  6907. Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:
  6908. @example
  6909. vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"
  6910. @end example
  6911. @item
  6912. Smoothen the video even more:
  6913. @example
  6914. vidstabtransform=smoothing=30
  6915. @end example
  6916. @end itemize
  6917. @section vflip
  6918. Flip the input video vertically.
  6919. For example, to vertically flip a video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6920. @example
  6921. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
  6922. @end example
  6923. @anchor{vignette}
  6924. @section vignette
  6925. Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
  6926. The filter accepts the following options:
  6927. @table @option
  6928. @item angle, a
  6929. Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
  6930. The value is clipped in the @code{[0,PI/2]} range.
  6931. Default value: @code{"PI/5"}
  6932. @item x0
  6933. @item y0
  6934. Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively @code{"w/2"} and @code{"h/2"}
  6935. by default.
  6936. @item mode
  6937. Set forward/backward mode.
  6938. Available modes are:
  6939. @table @samp
  6940. @item forward
  6941. The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
  6942. @item backward
  6943. The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
  6944. This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
  6945. detection to extract the lens @option{angle} and other settings (yet). It can
  6946. also be used to create a burning effect.
  6947. @end table
  6948. Default value is @samp{forward}.
  6949. @item eval
  6950. Set evaluation mode for the expressions (@option{angle}, @option{x0}, @option{y0}).
  6951. It accepts the following values:
  6952. @table @samp
  6953. @item init
  6954. Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
  6955. @item frame
  6956. Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
  6957. @samp{init} mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
  6958. allows advanced dynamic expressions.
  6959. @end table
  6960. Default value is @samp{init}.
  6961. @item dither
  6962. Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is @code{1}
  6963. (enabled).
  6964. @item aspect
  6965. Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
  6966. Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
  6967. following the dimensions of the video.
  6968. Default is @code{1/1}.
  6969. @end table
  6970. @subsection Expressions
  6971. The @option{alpha}, @option{x0} and @option{y0} expressions can contain the
  6972. following parameters.
  6973. @table @option
  6974. @item w
  6975. @item h
  6976. input width and height
  6977. @item n
  6978. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  6979. @item pts
  6980. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
  6981. @var{TB} units, NAN if undefined
  6982. @item r
  6983. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  6984. @item t
  6985. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  6986. expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
  6987. @item tb
  6988. time base of the input video
  6989. @end table
  6990. @subsection Examples
  6991. @itemize
  6992. @item
  6993. Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
  6994. @example
  6995. vignette=PI/4
  6996. @end example
  6997. @item
  6998. Make a flickering vignetting:
  6999. @example
  7000. vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
  7001. @end example
  7002. @end itemize
  7003. @section w3fdif
  7004. Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
  7005. Deinterlacing Filter").
  7006. Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
  7007. implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
  7008. Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
  7009. uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
  7010. There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
  7011. and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
  7012. be set by passing an optional parameter:
  7013. @table @option
  7014. @item filter
  7015. Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
  7016. @table @samp
  7017. @item simple
  7018. Simple filter coefficient set.
  7019. @item complex
  7020. More-complex filter coefficient set.
  7021. @end table
  7022. Default value is @samp{complex}.
  7023. @item deint
  7024. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
  7025. @table @samp
  7026. @item all
  7027. Deinterlace all frames,
  7028. @item interlaced
  7029. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  7030. @end table
  7031. Default value is @samp{all}.
  7032. @end table
  7033. @section xbr
  7034. Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
  7035. art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
  7036. @url{http://www.libretro.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&t=134}.
  7037. It accepts the following option:
  7038. @table @option
  7039. @item n
  7040. Set the scaling dimension: @code{2} for @code{2xBR}, @code{3} for
  7041. @code{3xBR} and @code{4} for @code{4xBR}.
  7042. Default is @code{3}.
  7043. @end table
  7044. @anchor{yadif}
  7045. @section yadif
  7046. Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
  7047. filter").
  7048. It accepts the following parameters:
  7049. @table @option
  7050. @item mode
  7051. The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
  7052. @table @option
  7053. @item 0, send_frame
  7054. Output one frame for each frame.
  7055. @item 1, send_field
  7056. Output one frame for each field.
  7057. @item 2, send_frame_nospatial
  7058. Like @code{send_frame}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  7059. @item 3, send_field_nospatial
  7060. Like @code{send_field}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  7061. @end table
  7062. The default value is @code{send_frame}.
  7063. @item parity
  7064. The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
  7065. of the following values:
  7066. @table @option
  7067. @item 0, tff
  7068. Assume the top field is first.
  7069. @item 1, bff
  7070. Assume the bottom field is first.
  7071. @item -1, auto
  7072. Enable automatic detection of field parity.
  7073. @end table
  7074. The default value is @code{auto}.
  7075. If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
  7076. top field first will be assumed.
  7077. @item deint
  7078. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
  7079. values:
  7080. @table @option
  7081. @item 0, all
  7082. Deinterlace all frames.
  7083. @item 1, interlaced
  7084. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  7085. @end table
  7086. The default value is @code{all}.
  7087. @end table
  7088. @section zoompan
  7089. Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
  7090. This filter accepts the following options:
  7091. @table @option
  7092. @item zoom, z
  7093. Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
  7094. @item x
  7095. @item y
  7096. Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
  7097. @item d
  7098. Set the duration expression in number of frames.
  7099. This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
  7100. single input image.
  7101. @item s
  7102. Set the output image size, default is 'hd720'.
  7103. @end table
  7104. Each expression can contain the following constants:
  7105. @table @option
  7106. @item in_w, iw
  7107. Input width.
  7108. @item in_h, ih
  7109. Input height.
  7110. @item out_w, ow
  7111. Output width.
  7112. @item out_h, oh
  7113. Output height.
  7114. @item in
  7115. Input frame count.
  7116. @item on
  7117. Output frame count.
  7118. @item x
  7119. @item y
  7120. Last calculated 'x' and 'y' position from 'x' and 'y' expression
  7121. for current input frame.
  7122. @item px
  7123. @item py
  7124. 'x' and 'y' of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
  7125. not yet such frame (first input frame).
  7126. @item zoom
  7127. Last calculated zoom from 'z' expression for current input frame.
  7128. @item pzoom
  7129. Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
  7130. @item duration
  7131. Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from 'd' expression
  7132. for each input frame.
  7133. @item pduration
  7134. number of output frames created for previous input frame
  7135. @item a
  7136. Rational number: input width / input height
  7137. @item sar
  7138. sample aspect ratio
  7139. @item dar
  7140. display aspect ratio
  7141. @end table
  7142. @subsection Examples
  7143. @itemize
  7144. @item
  7145. Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
  7146. @example
  7147. zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
  7148. @end example
  7149. @end itemize
  7150. @c man end VIDEO FILTERS
  7151. @chapter Video Sources
  7152. @c man begin VIDEO SOURCES
  7153. Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
  7154. @section buffer
  7155. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  7156. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  7157. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h}.
  7158. It accepts the following parameters:
  7159. @table @option
  7160. @item video_size
  7161. Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
  7162. syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
  7163. manual.
  7164. @item width
  7165. The input video width.
  7166. @item height
  7167. The input video height.
  7168. @item pix_fmt
  7169. A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
  7170. It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
  7171. name.
  7172. @item time_base
  7173. Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
  7174. @item frame_rate
  7175. Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
  7176. @item pixel_aspect, sar
  7177. The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
  7178. @item sws_param
  7179. Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
  7180. is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
  7181. input size or format.
  7182. @end table
  7183. For example:
  7184. @example
  7185. buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
  7186. @end example
  7187. will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
  7188. with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
  7189. square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
  7190. Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
  7191. (check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in @file{libavutil/pixfmt.h}),
  7192. this example corresponds to:
  7193. @example
  7194. buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
  7195. @end example
  7196. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
  7197. syntax is deprecated:
  7198. @var{width}:@var{height}:@var{pix_fmt}:@var{time_base.num}:@var{time_base.den}:@var{pixel_aspect.num}:@var{pixel_aspect.den}[:@var{sws_param}]
  7199. @section cellauto
  7200. Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
  7201. The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
  7202. @option{filename}, and @option{pattern} options. If such options are
  7203. not specified an initial state is created randomly.
  7204. At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
  7205. the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
  7206. frame is filled is defined by the @option{scroll} option.
  7207. This source accepts the following options:
  7208. @table @option
  7209. @item filename, f
  7210. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7211. the specified file.
  7212. In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
  7213. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7214. file will be ignored.
  7215. @item pattern, p
  7216. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  7217. the specified string.
  7218. Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
  7219. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  7220. string will be ignored.
  7221. @item rate, r
  7222. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7223. Default is 25.
  7224. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7225. Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
  7226. is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
  7227. 1/PHI.
  7228. This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
  7229. @item random_seed, seed
  7230. Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
  7231. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7232. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7233. effort basis.
  7234. @item rule
  7235. Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
  7236. Default value is 110.
  7237. @item size, s
  7238. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
  7239. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7240. If @option{filename} or @option{pattern} is specified, the size is set
  7241. by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
  7242. height is set to @var{width} * PHI.
  7243. If @option{size} is set, it must contain the width of the specified
  7244. pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
  7245. larger row.
  7246. If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
  7247. defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
  7248. @item scroll
  7249. If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
  7250. have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
  7251. written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
  7252. Defaults to 1.
  7253. @item start_full, full
  7254. If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
  7255. outputting the first frame.
  7256. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7257. @item stitch
  7258. If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
  7259. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  7260. @end table
  7261. @subsection Examples
  7262. @itemize
  7263. @item
  7264. Read the initial state from @file{pattern}, and specify an output of
  7265. size 200x400.
  7266. @example
  7267. cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
  7268. @end example
  7269. @item
  7270. Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
  7271. ratio of 2/3:
  7272. @example
  7273. cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7274. @end example
  7275. @item
  7276. Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
  7277. centered on an initial row with width 100:
  7278. @example
  7279. cellauto=p=@@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7280. @end example
  7281. @item
  7282. Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
  7283. @example
  7284. cellauto=p='@@@@ @@ @@@@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  7285. @end example
  7286. @end itemize
  7287. @section mandelbrot
  7288. Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
  7289. point specified with @var{start_x} and @var{start_y}.
  7290. This source accepts the following options:
  7291. @table @option
  7292. @item end_pts
  7293. Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
  7294. @item end_scale
  7295. Set the terminal scale value.
  7296. Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
  7297. @item inner
  7298. Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
  7299. Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
  7300. It shall assume one of the following values:
  7301. @table @option
  7302. @item black
  7303. Set black mode.
  7304. @item convergence
  7305. Show time until convergence.
  7306. @item mincol
  7307. Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
  7308. @item period
  7309. Set period mode.
  7310. @end table
  7311. Default value is @var{mincol}.
  7312. @item bailout
  7313. Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
  7314. @item maxiter
  7315. Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
  7316. algorithm. Default value is 7189.
  7317. @item outer
  7318. Set outer coloring mode.
  7319. It shall assume one of following values:
  7320. @table @option
  7321. @item iteration_count
  7322. Set iteration cound mode.
  7323. @item normalized_iteration_count
  7324. set normalized iteration count mode.
  7325. @end table
  7326. Default value is @var{normalized_iteration_count}.
  7327. @item rate, r
  7328. Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
  7329. value is "25".
  7330. @item size, s
  7331. Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
  7332. size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
  7333. @item start_scale
  7334. Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
  7335. @item start_x
  7336. Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
  7337. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
  7338. @item start_y
  7339. Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
  7340. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
  7341. @end table
  7342. @section mptestsrc
  7343. Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
  7344. The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
  7345. This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
  7346. This source accepts the following options:
  7347. @table @option
  7348. @item rate, r
  7349. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7350. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7351. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7352. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7353. "25".
  7354. @item duration, d
  7355. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  7356. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7357. for the accepted syntax.
  7358. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7359. supposed to be generated forever.
  7360. @item test, t
  7361. Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
  7362. @table @option
  7363. @item dc_luma
  7364. @item dc_chroma
  7365. @item freq_luma
  7366. @item freq_chroma
  7367. @item amp_luma
  7368. @item amp_chroma
  7369. @item cbp
  7370. @item mv
  7371. @item ring1
  7372. @item ring2
  7373. @item all
  7374. @end table
  7375. Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
  7376. @end table
  7377. Some examples:
  7378. @example
  7379. mptestsrc=t=dc_luma
  7380. @end example
  7381. will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
  7382. @section frei0r_src
  7383. Provide a frei0r source.
  7384. To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
  7385. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  7386. This source accepts the following parameters:
  7387. @table @option
  7388. @item size
  7389. The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7390. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7391. @item framerate
  7392. The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
  7393. @var{num}/@var{den} or a frame rate abbreviation.
  7394. @item filter_name
  7395. The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
  7396. how to set the parameters, read the @ref{frei0r} section in the video filters
  7397. documentation.
  7398. @item filter_params
  7399. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
  7400. @end table
  7401. For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
  7402. and frame rate 10 which is overlayed on the overlay filter main input:
  7403. @example
  7404. frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
  7405. @end example
  7406. @section life
  7407. Generate a life pattern.
  7408. This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.
  7409. The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
  7410. which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
  7411. interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
  7412. horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
  7413. At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
  7414. which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
  7415. cell stay alive or born. The @option{rule} option allows one to specify
  7416. the rule to adopt.
  7417. This source accepts the following options:
  7418. @table @option
  7419. @item filename, f
  7420. Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
  7421. each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
  7422. is used to delimit the end of each row.
  7423. If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
  7424. randomly.
  7425. @item rate, r
  7426. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  7427. Default is 25.
  7428. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  7429. Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
  7430. floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
  7431. It is ignored when a file is specified.
  7432. @item random_seed, seed
  7433. Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
  7434. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  7435. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  7436. effort basis.
  7437. @item rule
  7438. Set the life rule.
  7439. A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "S@var{NS}/B@var{NB}",
  7440. where @var{NS} and @var{NB} are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
  7441. @var{NS} specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
  7442. live cell stay alive, and @var{NB} the number of alive neighbor cells
  7443. which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
  7444. "s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
  7445. Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
  7446. high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
  7447. for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
  7448. the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
  7449. higher number of neighbor cells.
  7450. For example the number 6153 = @code{(12<<9)+9} specifies a stay alive
  7451. rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
  7452. Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway's game of life
  7453. rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
  7454. cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
  7455. a dead cell.
  7456. @item size, s
  7457. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7458. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7459. If @option{filename} is specified, the size is set by default to the
  7460. same size of the input file. If @option{size} is set, it must contain
  7461. the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
  7462. that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
  7463. If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
  7464. (used for a randomly generated initial grid).
  7465. @item stitch
  7466. If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
  7467. top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
  7468. @item mold
  7469. Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from @option{death_color} to
  7470. @option{mold_color} with a step of @option{mold}. @option{mold} can have a
  7471. value from 0 to 255.
  7472. @item life_color
  7473. Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
  7474. @item death_color
  7475. Set the color of dead cells. If @option{mold} is set, this is the first color
  7476. used to represent a dead cell.
  7477. @item mold_color
  7478. Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
  7479. For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
  7480. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7481. @end table
  7482. @subsection Examples
  7483. @itemize
  7484. @item
  7485. Read a grid from @file{pattern}, and center it on a grid of size
  7486. 300x300 pixels:
  7487. @example
  7488. life=f=pattern:s=300x300
  7489. @end example
  7490. @item
  7491. Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
  7492. @example
  7493. life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7494. @end example
  7495. @item
  7496. Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
  7497. @example
  7498. life=rule=S14/B34
  7499. @end example
  7500. @item
  7501. Full example with slow death effect (mold) using @command{ffplay}:
  7502. @example
  7503. ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
  7504. @end example
  7505. @end itemize
  7506. @anchor{color}
  7507. @anchor{haldclutsrc}
  7508. @anchor{nullsrc}
  7509. @anchor{rgbtestsrc}
  7510. @anchor{smptebars}
  7511. @anchor{smptehdbars}
  7512. @anchor{testsrc}
  7513. @section color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc
  7514. The @code{color} source provides an uniformly colored input.
  7515. The @code{haldclutsrc} source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
  7516. @ref{haldclut} filter.
  7517. The @code{nullsrc} source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
  7518. mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
  7519. source for filters which ignore the input data.
  7520. The @code{rgbtestsrc} source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
  7521. detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
  7522. stripe from top to bottom.
  7523. The @code{smptebars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7524. the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
  7525. The @code{smptehdbars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7526. the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
  7527. The @code{testsrc} source generates a test video pattern, showing a
  7528. color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
  7529. intended for testing purposes.
  7530. The sources accept the following parameters:
  7531. @table @option
  7532. @item color, c
  7533. Specify the color of the source, only available in the @code{color}
  7534. source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  7535. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7536. @item level
  7537. Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the @code{haldclutsrc}
  7538. source. A level of @code{N} generates a picture of @code{N*N*N} by @code{N*N*N}
  7539. pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
  7540. coded on a @code{1/(N*N)} scale.
  7541. @item size, s
  7542. Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7543. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
  7544. "320x240".
  7545. This option is not available with the @code{haldclutsrc} filter.
  7546. @item rate, r
  7547. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7548. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7549. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7550. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7551. "25".
  7552. @item sar
  7553. Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
  7554. @item duration, d
  7555. Set the duration of the sourced video. See
  7556. @ref{time duration syntax,,the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  7557. for the accepted syntax.
  7558. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7559. supposed to be generated forever.
  7560. @item decimals, n
  7561. Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
  7562. @code{testsrc} source.
  7563. The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
  7564. timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
  7565. value. Default value is 0.
  7566. @end table
  7567. For example the following:
  7568. @example
  7569. testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
  7570. @end example
  7571. will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
  7572. 176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
  7573. The following graph description will generate a red source
  7574. with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
  7575. frames per second.
  7576. @example
  7577. color=c=red@@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
  7578. @end example
  7579. If the input content is to be ignored, @code{nullsrc} can be used. The
  7580. following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
  7581. the @code{geq} filter:
  7582. @example
  7583. nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
  7584. @end example
  7585. @subsection Commands
  7586. The @code{color} source supports the following commands:
  7587. @table @option
  7588. @item c, color
  7589. Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
  7590. corresponding @option{color} option.
  7591. @end table
  7592. @c man end VIDEO SOURCES
  7593. @chapter Video Sinks
  7594. @c man begin VIDEO SINKS
  7595. Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
  7596. @section buffersink
  7597. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
  7598. graph.
  7599. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  7600. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  7601. or the options system.
  7602. It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
  7603. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  7604. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  7605. @section nullsink
  7606. Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
  7607. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  7608. tools.
  7609. @c man end VIDEO SINKS
  7610. @chapter Multimedia Filters
  7611. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  7612. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
  7613. @section avectorscope
  7614. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
  7615. scope.
  7616. The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
  7617. audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
  7618. signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
  7619. as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
  7620. If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
  7621. indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
  7622. The filter accepts the following options:
  7623. @table @option
  7624. @item mode, m
  7625. Set the vectorscope mode.
  7626. Available values are:
  7627. @table @samp
  7628. @item lissajous
  7629. Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
  7630. @item lissajous_xy
  7631. Same as above but not rotated.
  7632. @end table
  7633. Default value is @samp{lissajous}.
  7634. @item size, s
  7635. Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  7636. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is @code{400x400}.
  7637. @item rate, r
  7638. Set the output frame rate. Default value is @code{25}.
  7639. @item rc
  7640. @item gc
  7641. @item bc
  7642. Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are @code{40}, @code{160} and @code{80}.
  7643. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7644. @item rf
  7645. @item gf
  7646. @item bf
  7647. Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are @code{15}, @code{10} and @code{5}.
  7648. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7649. @item zoom
  7650. Set the zoom factor. Default value is @code{1}. Allowed range is @code{[1, 10]}.
  7651. @end table
  7652. @subsection Examples
  7653. @itemize
  7654. @item
  7655. Complete example using @command{ffplay}:
  7656. @example
  7657. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  7658. [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
  7659. @end example
  7660. @end itemize
  7661. @section concat
  7662. Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
  7663. other.
  7664. The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
  7665. segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
  7666. also be the number of streams at output.
  7667. The filter accepts the following options:
  7668. @table @option
  7669. @item n
  7670. Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
  7671. @item v
  7672. Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
  7673. streams in each segment. Default is 1.
  7674. @item a
  7675. Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
  7676. streams in each segment. Default is 0.
  7677. @item unsafe
  7678. Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
  7679. @end table
  7680. The filter has @var{v}+@var{a} outputs: first @var{v} video outputs, then
  7681. @var{a} audio outputs.
  7682. There are @var{n}x(@var{v}+@var{a}) inputs: first the inputs for the first
  7683. segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
  7684. segment, etc.
  7685. Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
  7686. reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
  7687. related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
  7688. concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
  7689. stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
  7690. audio streams with silence.
  7691. For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
  7692. All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
  7693. filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
  7694. streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
  7695. audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
  7696. explicitly by the user.
  7697. Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
  7698. at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
  7699. @subsection Examples
  7700. @itemize
  7701. @item
  7702. Concatenate an opening, an episode and an ending, all in bilingual version
  7703. (video in stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):
  7704. @example
  7705. ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
  7706. '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
  7707. concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
  7708. -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv
  7709. @end example
  7710. @item
  7711. Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the
  7712. (a)movie sources, and adjusting the resolution:
  7713. @example
  7714. movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
  7715. movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
  7716. [v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]
  7717. @end example
  7718. Note that a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams
  7719. do not have exactly the same duration in the first file.
  7720. @end itemize
  7721. @section ebur128
  7722. EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
  7723. it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
  7724. Momentary loudness (identified by @code{M}), Short-term loudness (@code{S}),
  7725. Integrated loudness (@code{I}) and Loudness Range (@code{LRA}).
  7726. The filter also has a video output (see the @var{video} option) with a real
  7727. time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
  7728. message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
  7729. unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
  7730. short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
  7731. the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
  7732. More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
  7733. @url{http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness}.
  7734. The filter accepts the following options:
  7735. @table @option
  7736. @item video
  7737. Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
  7738. option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
  7739. activated. Default is @code{0}.
  7740. @item size
  7741. Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
  7742. option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
  7743. and minimum resolution is @code{640x480}.
  7744. @item meter
  7745. Set the EBU scale meter. Default is @code{9}. Common values are @code{9} and
  7746. @code{18}, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
  7747. other integer value between this range is allowed.
  7748. @item metadata
  7749. Set metadata injection. If set to @code{1}, the audio input will be segmented
  7750. into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
  7751. in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with @code{lavfi.r128.}.
  7752. Default is @code{0}.
  7753. @item framelog
  7754. Force the frame logging level.
  7755. Available values are:
  7756. @table @samp
  7757. @item info
  7758. information logging level
  7759. @item verbose
  7760. verbose logging level
  7761. @end table
  7762. By default, the logging level is set to @var{info}. If the @option{video} or
  7763. the @option{metadata} options are set, it switches to @var{verbose}.
  7764. @item peak
  7765. Set peak mode(s).
  7766. Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a @code{flag} type). Possible
  7767. values are:
  7768. @table @samp
  7769. @item none
  7770. Disable any peak mode (default).
  7771. @item sample
  7772. Enable sample-peak mode.
  7773. Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
  7774. for sample-peak (identified by @code{SPK}).
  7775. @item true
  7776. Enable true-peak mode.
  7777. If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
  7778. stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
  7779. (identified by @code{TPK}) and true-peak per frame (identified by @code{FTPK}).
  7780. This mode requires a build with @code{libswresample}.
  7781. @end table
  7782. @end table
  7783. @subsection Examples
  7784. @itemize
  7785. @item
  7786. Real-time graph using @command{ffplay}, with a EBU scale meter +18:
  7787. @example
  7788. ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
  7789. @end example
  7790. @item
  7791. Run an analysis with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7792. @example
  7793. ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
  7794. @end example
  7795. @end itemize
  7796. @section interleave, ainterleave
  7797. Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
  7798. @code{interleave} works with video inputs, @code{ainterleave} with audio.
  7799. These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
  7800. queued frame to the output.
  7801. Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
  7802. timestamp values.
  7803. In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
  7804. at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
  7805. input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
  7806. For example consider the case when one input is a @code{select} filter
  7807. which always drop input frames. The @code{interleave} filter will keep
  7808. reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
  7809. to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
  7810. Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
  7811. frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
  7812. the queue is already filled.
  7813. These filters accept the following options:
  7814. @table @option
  7815. @item nb_inputs, n
  7816. Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
  7817. @end table
  7818. @subsection Examples
  7819. @itemize
  7820. @item
  7821. Interleave frames belonging to different streams using @command{ffmpeg}:
  7822. @example
  7823. ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
  7824. @end example
  7825. @item
  7826. Add flickering blur effect:
  7827. @example
  7828. select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
  7829. @end example
  7830. @end itemize
  7831. @section perms, aperms
  7832. Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
  7833. These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
  7834. following filter in the filtergraph.
  7835. The filters accept the following options:
  7836. @table @option
  7837. @item mode
  7838. Select the permissions mode.
  7839. It accepts the following values:
  7840. @table @samp
  7841. @item none
  7842. Do nothing. This is the default.
  7843. @item ro
  7844. Set all the output frames read-only.
  7845. @item rw
  7846. Set all the output frames directly writable.
  7847. @item toggle
  7848. Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
  7849. @item random
  7850. Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
  7851. @end table
  7852. @item seed
  7853. Set the seed for the @var{random} mode, must be an integer included between
  7854. @code{0} and @code{UINT32_MAX}. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
  7855. @code{-1}, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
  7856. basis.
  7857. @end table
  7858. Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
  7859. following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
  7860. following filter. Inserting a @ref{format} or @ref{aformat} filter before the
  7861. perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
  7862. @section select, aselect
  7863. Select frames to pass in output.
  7864. This filter accepts the following options:
  7865. @table @option
  7866. @item expr, e
  7867. Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
  7868. If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
  7869. If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
  7870. first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
  7871. @code{ceil(val)-1}, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
  7872. For example a value of @code{1.2} corresponds to the output with index
  7873. @code{ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1}, that is the second output.
  7874. @item outputs, n
  7875. Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
  7876. frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
  7877. @end table
  7878. The expression can contain the following constants:
  7879. @table @option
  7880. @item n
  7881. The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
  7882. @item selected_n
  7883. The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
  7884. @item prev_selected_n
  7885. The sequential number of the last selected frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7886. @item TB
  7887. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  7888. @item pts
  7889. The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  7890. expressed in @var{TB} units. It's NAN if undefined.
  7891. @item t
  7892. The PTS of the filtered video frame,
  7893. expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.
  7894. @item prev_pts
  7895. The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7896. @item prev_selected_pts
  7897. The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7898. @item prev_selected_t
  7899. The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7900. @item start_pts
  7901. The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  7902. @item start_t
  7903. The time of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  7904. @item pict_type @emph{(video only)}
  7905. The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
  7906. values:
  7907. @table @option
  7908. @item I
  7909. @item P
  7910. @item B
  7911. @item S
  7912. @item SI
  7913. @item SP
  7914. @item BI
  7915. @end table
  7916. @item interlace_type @emph{(video only)}
  7917. The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
  7918. @table @option
  7919. @item PROGRESSIVE
  7920. The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
  7921. @item TOPFIRST
  7922. The frame is top-field-first.
  7923. @item BOTTOMFIRST
  7924. The frame is bottom-field-first.
  7925. @end table
  7926. @item consumed_sample_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7927. the number of selected samples before the current frame
  7928. @item samples_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7929. the number of samples in the current frame
  7930. @item sample_rate @emph{(audio only)}
  7931. the input sample rate
  7932. @item key
  7933. This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
  7934. @item pos
  7935. the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
  7936. is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
  7937. @item scene @emph{(video only)}
  7938. value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
  7939. probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
  7940. value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
  7941. @end table
  7942. The default value of the select expression is "1".
  7943. @subsection Examples
  7944. @itemize
  7945. @item
  7946. Select all frames in input:
  7947. @example
  7948. select
  7949. @end example
  7950. The example above is the same as:
  7951. @example
  7952. select=1
  7953. @end example
  7954. @item
  7955. Skip all frames:
  7956. @example
  7957. select=0
  7958. @end example
  7959. @item
  7960. Select only I-frames:
  7961. @example
  7962. select='eq(pict_type\,I)'
  7963. @end example
  7964. @item
  7965. Select one frame every 100:
  7966. @example
  7967. select='not(mod(n\,100))'
  7968. @end example
  7969. @item
  7970. Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7971. @example
  7972. select=between(t\,10\,20)
  7973. @end example
  7974. @item
  7975. Select only I frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7976. @example
  7977. select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)
  7978. @end example
  7979. @item
  7980. Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:
  7981. @example
  7982. select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'
  7983. @end example
  7984. @item
  7985. Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number > 100:
  7986. @example
  7987. aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'
  7988. @end example
  7989. @item
  7990. Create a mosaic of the first scenes:
  7991. @example
  7992. ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png
  7993. @end example
  7994. Comparing @var{scene} against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane
  7995. choice.
  7996. @item
  7997. Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:
  7998. @example
  7999. select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h
  8000. @end example
  8001. @end itemize
  8002. @section sendcmd, asendcmd
  8003. Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
  8004. These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
  8005. filtergraph.
  8006. @code{sendcmd} must be inserted between two video filters,
  8007. @code{asendcmd} must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
  8008. from that they act the same way.
  8009. The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
  8010. with the @var{commands} option, or in a file specified by the
  8011. @var{filename} option.
  8012. These filters accept the following options:
  8013. @table @option
  8014. @item commands, c
  8015. Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
  8016. @item filename, f
  8017. Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
  8018. filters.
  8019. @end table
  8020. @subsection Commands syntax
  8021. A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
  8022. specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
  8023. particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
  8024. is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
  8025. interval.
  8026. An interval is specified by the following syntax:
  8027. @example
  8028. @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS};
  8029. @end example
  8030. The time interval is specified by the @var{START} and @var{END} times.
  8031. @var{END} is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
  8032. The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
  8033. it is included in the interval [@var{START}, @var{END}), that is when
  8034. the time is greater or equal to @var{START} and is lesser than
  8035. @var{END}.
  8036. @var{COMMANDS} consists of a sequence of one or more command
  8037. specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
  8038. syntax of a command specification is given by:
  8039. @example
  8040. [@var{FLAGS}] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} @var{ARG}
  8041. @end example
  8042. @var{FLAGS} is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
  8043. the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
  8044. be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
  8045. enclosed between "[" and "]".
  8046. The following flags are recognized:
  8047. @table @option
  8048. @item enter
  8049. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
  8050. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  8051. previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
  8052. current is.
  8053. @item leave
  8054. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
  8055. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  8056. previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
  8057. current is not.
  8058. @end table
  8059. If @var{FLAGS} is not specified, a default value of @code{[enter]} is
  8060. assumed.
  8061. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  8062. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  8063. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  8064. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
  8065. the given @var{COMMAND}.
  8066. Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
  8067. sequences of characters starting with @code{#} until the end of line,
  8068. are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
  8069. A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
  8070. follows:
  8071. @example
  8072. @var{COMMAND_FLAG} ::= "enter" | "leave"
  8073. @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} ::= @var{COMMAND_FLAG} [(+|"|")@var{COMMAND_FLAG}]
  8074. @var{COMMAND} ::= ["[" @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} "]"] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  8075. @var{COMMANDS} ::= @var{COMMAND} [,@var{COMMANDS}]
  8076. @var{INTERVAL} ::= @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS}
  8077. @var{INTERVALS} ::= @var{INTERVAL}[;@var{INTERVALS}]
  8078. @end example
  8079. @subsection Examples
  8080. @itemize
  8081. @item
  8082. Specify audio tempo change at second 4:
  8083. @example
  8084. asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo
  8085. @end example
  8086. @item
  8087. Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.
  8088. @example
  8089. # show text in the interval 5-10
  8090. 5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
  8091. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';
  8092. # desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
  8093. 15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
  8094. [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
  8095. [leave] hue s 1,
  8096. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';
  8097. # apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
  8098. 25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)
  8099. @end example
  8100. A filtergraph allowing to read and process the above command list
  8101. stored in a file @file{test.cmd}, can be specified with:
  8102. @example
  8103. sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue
  8104. @end example
  8105. @end itemize
  8106. @anchor{setpts}
  8107. @section setpts, asetpts
  8108. Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
  8109. @code{setpts} works on video frames, @code{asetpts} on audio frames.
  8110. This filter accepts the following options:
  8111. @table @option
  8112. @item expr
  8113. The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
  8114. @end table
  8115. The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
  8116. constants:
  8117. @table @option
  8118. @item FRAME_RATE
  8119. frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
  8120. @item PTS
  8121. The presentation timestamp in input
  8122. @item N
  8123. The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
  8124. not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
  8125. @item NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES
  8126. The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
  8127. audio)
  8128. @item NB_SAMPLES, S
  8129. The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
  8130. @item SAMPLE_RATE, SR
  8131. The audio sample rate.
  8132. @item STARTPTS
  8133. The PTS of the first frame.
  8134. @item STARTT
  8135. the time in seconds of the first frame
  8136. @item INTERLACED
  8137. State whether the current frame is interlaced.
  8138. @item T
  8139. the time in seconds of the current frame
  8140. @item POS
  8141. original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
  8142. for the current frame
  8143. @item PREV_INPTS
  8144. The previous input PTS.
  8145. @item PREV_INT
  8146. previous input time in seconds
  8147. @item PREV_OUTPTS
  8148. The previous output PTS.
  8149. @item PREV_OUTT
  8150. previous output time in seconds
  8151. @item RTCTIME
  8152. The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds.. This is deprecated, use time(0)
  8153. instead.
  8154. @item RTCSTART
  8155. The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
  8156. @item TB
  8157. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  8158. @end table
  8159. @subsection Examples
  8160. @itemize
  8161. @item
  8162. Start counting PTS from zero
  8163. @example
  8164. setpts=PTS-STARTPTS
  8165. @end example
  8166. @item
  8167. Apply fast motion effect:
  8168. @example
  8169. setpts=0.5*PTS
  8170. @end example
  8171. @item
  8172. Apply slow motion effect:
  8173. @example
  8174. setpts=2.0*PTS
  8175. @end example
  8176. @item
  8177. Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
  8178. @example
  8179. setpts=N/(25*TB)
  8180. @end example
  8181. @item
  8182. Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
  8183. @example
  8184. setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
  8185. @end example
  8186. @item
  8187. Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
  8188. @example
  8189. setpts=PTS+10/TB
  8190. @end example
  8191. @item
  8192. Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
  8193. @example
  8194. setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
  8195. @end example
  8196. @item
  8197. Generate timestamps by counting samples:
  8198. @example
  8199. asetpts=N/SR/TB
  8200. @end example
  8201. @end itemize
  8202. @section settb, asettb
  8203. Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
  8204. It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
  8205. It accepts the following parameters:
  8206. @table @option
  8207. @item expr, tb
  8208. The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
  8209. @end table
  8210. The value for @option{tb} is an arithmetic expression representing a
  8211. rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
  8212. timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
  8213. audio only). Default value is "intb".
  8214. @subsection Examples
  8215. @itemize
  8216. @item
  8217. Set the timebase to 1/25:
  8218. @example
  8219. settb=expr=1/25
  8220. @end example
  8221. @item
  8222. Set the timebase to 1/10:
  8223. @example
  8224. settb=expr=0.1
  8225. @end example
  8226. @item
  8227. Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
  8228. @example
  8229. settb=1+0.001
  8230. @end example
  8231. @item
  8232. Set the timebase to 2*intb:
  8233. @example
  8234. settb=2*intb
  8235. @end example
  8236. @item
  8237. Set the default timebase value:
  8238. @example
  8239. settb=AVTB
  8240. @end example
  8241. @end itemize
  8242. @section showcqt
  8243. Convert input audio to a video output representing
  8244. frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
  8245. Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
  8246. The filter accepts the following options:
  8247. @table @option
  8248. @item volume
  8249. Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
  8250. variables:
  8251. @table @option
  8252. @item frequency, freq, f
  8253. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8254. @item timeclamp, tc
  8255. value of timeclamp option
  8256. @end table
  8257. and functions:
  8258. @table @option
  8259. @item a_weighting(f)
  8260. A-weighting of equal loudness
  8261. @item b_weighting(f)
  8262. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8263. @item c_weighting(f)
  8264. C-weighting of equal loudness
  8265. @end table
  8266. Default value is @code{16}.
  8267. @item tlength
  8268. Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
  8269. @table @option
  8270. @item frequency, freq, f
  8271. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8272. @item timeclamp, tc
  8273. value of timeclamp option
  8274. @end table
  8275. Default value is @code{384/f*tc/(384/f+tc)}.
  8276. @item timeclamp
  8277. Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
  8278. accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
  8279. event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
  8280. otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
  8281. (such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is @code{0.17}.
  8282. @item coeffclamp
  8283. Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
  8284. more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
  8285. Default value is @code{1.0}.
  8286. @item gamma
  8287. Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
  8288. makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
  8289. Default value is @code{3.0}.
  8290. @item fontfile
  8291. Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
  8292. @item fontcolor
  8293. Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
  8294. integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
  8295. @table @option
  8296. @item frequency, freq, f
  8297. the frequency where transform is evaluated
  8298. @item timeclamp, tc
  8299. value of timeclamp option
  8300. @end table
  8301. and functions:
  8302. @table @option
  8303. @item midi(f)
  8304. midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
  8305. @item r(x), g(x), b(x)
  8306. red, green, and blue value of intensity x
  8307. @end table
  8308. Default value is @code{st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
  8309. st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
  8310. r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))}
  8311. @item fullhd
  8312. If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
  8313. if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
  8314. @item fps
  8315. Specify video fps. Default value is @code{25}.
  8316. @item count
  8317. Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
  8318. per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
  8319. Default value is @code{6}.
  8320. @end table
  8321. @subsection Examples
  8322. @itemize
  8323. @item
  8324. Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
  8325. @example
  8326. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8327. @end example
  8328. @item
  8329. Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
  8330. @example
  8331. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
  8332. @end example
  8333. @item
  8334. Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
  8335. @example
  8336. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
  8337. @end example
  8338. @item
  8339. A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
  8340. @example
  8341. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8342. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  8343. @end example
  8344. @item
  8345. Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
  8346. @example
  8347. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  8348. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
  8349. @end example
  8350. @item
  8351. B-weighting of equal loudness
  8352. @example
  8353. volume=16*b_weighting(f)
  8354. @end example
  8355. @item
  8356. Lower Q factor
  8357. @example
  8358. tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
  8359. @end example
  8360. @item
  8361. Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
  8362. @example
  8363. fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
  8364. @end example
  8365. @end itemize
  8366. @section showspectrum
  8367. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
  8368. spectrum.
  8369. The filter accepts the following options:
  8370. @table @option
  8371. @item size, s
  8372. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  8373. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
  8374. @code{640x512}.
  8375. @item slide
  8376. Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
  8377. It accepts the following values:
  8378. @table @samp
  8379. @item replace
  8380. the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
  8381. @item scroll
  8382. the samples scroll from right to left
  8383. @item fullframe
  8384. frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
  8385. @end table
  8386. Default value is @code{replace}.
  8387. @item mode
  8388. Specify display mode.
  8389. It accepts the following values:
  8390. @table @samp
  8391. @item combined
  8392. all channels are displayed in the same row
  8393. @item separate
  8394. all channels are displayed in separate rows
  8395. @end table
  8396. Default value is @samp{combined}.
  8397. @item color
  8398. Specify display color mode.
  8399. It accepts the following values:
  8400. @table @samp
  8401. @item channel
  8402. each channel is displayed in a separate color
  8403. @item intensity
  8404. each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
  8405. @end table
  8406. Default value is @samp{channel}.
  8407. @item scale
  8408. Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
  8409. It accepts the following values:
  8410. @table @samp
  8411. @item lin
  8412. linear
  8413. @item sqrt
  8414. square root, default
  8415. @item cbrt
  8416. cubic root
  8417. @item log
  8418. logarithmic
  8419. @end table
  8420. Default value is @samp{sqrt}.
  8421. @item saturation
  8422. Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
  8423. alternative color scheme. @code{0} is no saturation at all.
  8424. Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
  8425. Default value is @code{1}.
  8426. @item win_func
  8427. Set window function.
  8428. It accepts the following values:
  8429. @table @samp
  8430. @item none
  8431. No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
  8432. @item hann
  8433. Hann window
  8434. @item hamming
  8435. Hamming window
  8436. @item blackman
  8437. Blackman window
  8438. @end table
  8439. Default value is @code{hann}.
  8440. @end table
  8441. The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
  8442. section.
  8443. @subsection Examples
  8444. @itemize
  8445. @item
  8446. Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
  8447. @example
  8448. showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
  8449. @end example
  8450. @item
  8451. Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using @command{ffplay}:
  8452. @example
  8453. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  8454. [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
  8455. @end example
  8456. @end itemize
  8457. @section showwaves
  8458. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
  8459. The filter accepts the following options:
  8460. @table @option
  8461. @item size, s
  8462. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  8463. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
  8464. is "600x240".
  8465. @item mode
  8466. Set display mode.
  8467. Available values are:
  8468. @table @samp
  8469. @item point
  8470. Draw a point for each sample.
  8471. @item line
  8472. Draw a vertical line for each sample.
  8473. @item p2p
  8474. Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
  8475. @item cline
  8476. Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
  8477. @end table
  8478. Default value is @code{point}.
  8479. @item n
  8480. Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
  8481. larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
  8482. integer. This option can be set only if the value for @var{rate}
  8483. is not explicitly specified.
  8484. @item rate, r
  8485. Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
  8486. option @var{n}. Default value is "25".
  8487. @item split_channels
  8488. Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
  8489. @end table
  8490. @subsection Examples
  8491. @itemize
  8492. @item
  8493. Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
  8494. at the same time:
  8495. @example
  8496. amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
  8497. @end example
  8498. @item
  8499. Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
  8500. frame rate of 30 frames per second:
  8501. @example
  8502. aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
  8503. @end example
  8504. @end itemize
  8505. @section split, asplit
  8506. Split input into several identical outputs.
  8507. @code{asplit} works with audio input, @code{split} with video.
  8508. The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
  8509. unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  8510. @subsection Examples
  8511. @itemize
  8512. @item
  8513. Create two separate outputs from the same input:
  8514. @example
  8515. [in] split [out0][out1]
  8516. @end example
  8517. @item
  8518. To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
  8519. outputs, like in:
  8520. @example
  8521. [in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
  8522. @end example
  8523. @item
  8524. Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
  8525. one padded:
  8526. @example
  8527. [in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
  8528. [splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
  8529. [splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
  8530. @end example
  8531. @item
  8532. Create 5 copies of the input audio with @command{ffmpeg}:
  8533. @example
  8534. ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
  8535. @end example
  8536. @end itemize
  8537. @section zmq, azmq
  8538. Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
  8539. filters in the filtergraph.
  8540. @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} work as a pass-through filters. @code{zmq}
  8541. must be inserted between two video filters, @code{azmq} between two
  8542. audio filters.
  8543. To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
  8544. headers and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libzmq}.
  8545. For more information about libzmq see:
  8546. @url{http://www.zeromq.org/}
  8547. The @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} filters work as a libzmq server, which
  8548. receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
  8549. @option{bind_address} option.
  8550. The received message must be in the form:
  8551. @example
  8552. @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  8553. @end example
  8554. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  8555. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  8556. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  8557. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
  8558. given @var{COMMAND}.
  8559. Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
  8560. is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
  8561. will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
  8562. @example
  8563. @var{ERROR_CODE} @var{ERROR_REASON}
  8564. @var{MESSAGE}
  8565. @end example
  8566. @var{MESSAGE} is optional.
  8567. @subsection Examples
  8568. Look at @file{tools/zmqsend} for an example of a zmq client which can
  8569. be used to send commands processed by these filters.
  8570. Consider the following filtergraph generated by @command{ffplay}
  8571. @example
  8572. ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
  8573. color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
  8574. color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
  8575. nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
  8576. [bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
  8577. [bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
  8578. @end example
  8579. To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
  8580. command can be used:
  8581. @example
  8582. echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
  8583. @end example
  8584. To change the right side:
  8585. @example
  8586. echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
  8587. @end example
  8588. @c man end MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  8589. @chapter Multimedia Sources
  8590. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
  8591. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
  8592. @section amovie
  8593. This is the same as @ref{movie} source, except it selects an audio
  8594. stream by default.
  8595. @anchor{movie}
  8596. @section movie
  8597. Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
  8598. It accepts the following parameters:
  8599. @table @option
  8600. @item filename
  8601. The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
  8602. device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
  8603. @item format_name, f
  8604. Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
  8605. the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
  8606. format is guessed from @var{movie_name} or by probing.
  8607. @item seek_point, sp
  8608. Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
  8609. starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
  8610. @code{av_strtod}, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
  8611. postfix. The default value is "0".
  8612. @item streams, s
  8613. Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
  8614. separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
  8615. same order. The syntax is explained in the ``Stream specifiers''
  8616. section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
  8617. respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
  8618. is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
  8619. @item stream_index, si
  8620. Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
  8621. the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
  8622. value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
  8623. audio instead of video.
  8624. @item loop
  8625. Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
  8626. If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
  8627. Default value is "1".
  8628. Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
  8629. changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
  8630. @end table
  8631. It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
  8632. a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
  8633. @example
  8634. input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
  8635. ^
  8636. |
  8637. movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
  8638. @end example
  8639. @subsection Examples
  8640. @itemize
  8641. @item
  8642. Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
  8643. on top of the input labelled "in":
  8644. @example
  8645. movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8646. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8647. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8648. @end example
  8649. @item
  8650. Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
  8651. labelled "in":
  8652. @example
  8653. movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8654. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8655. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8656. @end example
  8657. @item
  8658. Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
  8659. dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
  8660. connected to the pad named "audio":
  8661. @example
  8662. movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
  8663. @end example
  8664. @end itemize
  8665. @c man end MULTIMEDIA SOURCES